Home

GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual(SW4D5C

1. END E EE muUa Ba EEs ERs EE EBs Hio Ld ok Ld 8 12 Ris EA 14 Ris HA 16 EE 20 dd OK Lda OK dB OK dB OK dd OK dij OK OK E 21 ER ee fees EE 24 E 25 EF 26 E 27 EE 28 ER 2 EF 30 dd OK Lda OK da OK d ok dR OK dd OK Lda OK gd OK gd OK EE mao Ess Ess EEG Ass EE EHao o ox ox LE ok 28 41 42 Eas 2844 Eas Eas Ea 2850 dd OK dd OK dll OK dd ok di OK dd OK B OK gd OK 51 52 8 5 EA s 855 ER 8 57 8 55 EF 5 EE co d OK d OK d gl OK dd OK gd OK gd OK Fes lea ok 1 15 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 1 3 6 Features of the List editor function Installation of the List editor function OS into the memory with the drawing software allows for list edit of the sequence program in the ACPU The following shows features of the List editor function 1 Easy parameters and sequence program maintenance Simple key operations allow checks partial modifications changes and additions of the parameters and the sequence program i
2. Fact Sea 4 Used to select a data entry field device rame Specii advice n mber Aphanumene Used to enter a device name or device number i lt gt DEVICEI lt gt DEVICE JET i Used to stop the defect search returning 4 7 8 9 4 i 8 LF P W LR EAE to the ladder monitor screen 2 2 AC DEL 4 0 DEL 1 Use the following touch keys if you want to delete any i data entry a AC Clears all the data entered in a specific field DEL Clears one character at the cursor position v STEP 63 932 M120 57H 0030 bp 54 M120 5 Start searching for a device that caused a failure and view search results on the ladder monitor screen Search from the last step number backward as displayed on the ladder monitor screen Please note that any touch keys other than Esc and Exit are enabled until the defect search is completed 6 10 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Search results Search results reveal any occurrences of the search device They are useful when you determine whether a defective device is conductive or
3. Sample display 2 for I O module Monitor screen X MODULE 0000000000000000 m E loooo coco eo eeoooe 1 Menu screen The menu is displayed classified into monitor items for the special function module only The object monitor screen is displayed by selecting the item from the menu 2 Monitor screen With the special function module the buffer memory contents and the status of the PLC CPU I O signals are monitored using text numbers and graphs With the I O module the status of I O signals to and from an external module is monitored 1 12 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 2 Data can be changed by writing see Section 12 1 5 for details Writing example Monitor screen When changing channel that can be changed AD Parameter Data Monitor Screen A68RD Graph monitor screen x ve xz ABODDERE 7654321 2000000011110100 vo 1 0000000000000000 i Yee ABCDDE mm Menu 000000000000000 De ueni Selection E r 8 882598 1 The designated values are written into the user specified buffer memory by writing the values from the monitor 2 When changing the buffer memory data input the numeric value using the auto display key window and
4. SET Data MONIT 070 Zero Return Data Monitor Screen RESET Che Menu END Weems Ab Posit Start2 Feed Position 01234567890 Present Value 01234567990 I 13 Forward Start Reverse Start 3 Actual Position 01234567890 Travel Dist 01234567830 I 14 Fudd Jog Start Rev Jog Start 4 Error Counter 01234567890 Velocity 012345 PLS s 15 Za Vel Poas Restart Posit Complete5 Pos Address Pl 01234567890 Jog Velocity 012945 PLS s 16 1 zero Rtn Reques6 Pos Address P2 01254567890 Mravel Dist After Near zero zero Rtn Start Point Signal Turned ON zero Rtn Comple7 Pos Velocity vi 012345 PLS s 01234567890 r 17 stop 8 Fos velocity 012345 PL amp sfravel Dist After Near Zero BUSY I Point Signal ON In position 9 Pos Pattern 0 01234567890 18 WP Switchover V P Mode 0 Fero address 01234567890 19 0 Positioning WDT Error 10 1 velocity ero Rtn Vel 012345PLS s 20 Excessive Error Errar Detection Error Code 1 012 2 012 Creep Velocitu 012345 5 5 I 21 11 12 Contents of display Buffer memory address to reference decimal 1 The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed Lg The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display The calculated command pulse number PLS based on the command value is displayed 100 101 2 The actual amount of servo movement feedback pulse number PLS calculated from the 3 SS 102 1
5. SETZ Data MONIT amp 615TD Setting Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END CNT No 0 ENT No 1 CNT No 2 CNT No 3 CNT No 4 ENT Na NT Now CH 1 01294 W 01234 W 01234 W 01234 01234 W 01234 B 01234 W CH 2 01234 W 01294 W 01234 W 01234 01234 W 01234 W 01234 CH 3 01254 W 01234 W 01234 W 01234 01234 01234 W 01234 CH 4 01254 W 01294 W 01234 W 01234 01234 01234 01234 CH 5 01234 W 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 6 01294 W 01234 W 01234 01234 W 01234 01234 01234 CH 7 01234 W 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 CH 01234 W 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 CH 9 01254 W 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 CH A 01294 W 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 B 01294 W 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 CH C 01294 W 01234 W 01234 01234 01234 01234 01234 CH D 01234 W 01294 W 01234 W 01234 01234 01234 01234 01254 W 01234 M 01234 W 01254 W 01234 01234 01234 F 01294 W 01294 M 01234 M 01234 W 01254 W 01234 W 01294 Col Ay Err bomp Value Error Code If Error Code 70 Col Bi Sensor Type 01 Wrong Sensor Type CNT No MX EH O 1 2 3 4 Buffer memory address to No f ob display reference hexadecimal The set value corresponding to the thermocouple used in each channel is displayed only in the column of the the CNT No to which the AGOMXT is connected The types of thermocouples
6. 4 8 Screen saver function 4 9 Screen saver Human sensor 4 9 Screen save time 4 8 Security password 4 14 DEMOS Tuin rote eS 4 10 Sep einer ete aen 4 7 Special module monitor function 1 12 Specifications Ladder monitor function 3 1 Network monitor function 3 8 Special module monitor function 3 4 System monitor function 3 2 List editor function 3 10 Specifying the monitor station and device 9 4 Switching the display form 9 2 System monitor function 1 10 T TC monitor arse 9 12 Test for special function module 12 5 Test function 9 16 U Utility function 1 6 Utility function list 4 1 Index 2 MEMO Index 3 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defects hereinafter failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost vi
7. eese eseesse eai 12 13 12 5 1 Operation monitor eee cete Lee ees i du Ede curo er ee ie ede edes 12 13 12 5 2 Graph monitor a ain ee peo ce e Are ave re ave Ee ave a aves 12 14 A1S62DA module MONON eee ce ce ceeee cee ceeeeeeeeecaeeeeeeaeeaecaeesaeeaecaesaeeeaeeaecaeseseaesaeseeseestaesaneaeeaees 12 15 12 6 1 Operation monitor earns ace wih i e ete eoe e ecd s 12 15 A62LS module monitor esesssssssssssseesessee esee tnnt nnn tn tnit 12 16 12 7 1 Operation eere te P eret PERO E PUE br 12 16 12 47 27 WO oet dere ete rre aa m rid dE ede A 12 17 A1S62RD module monitor sess eene nentes trennen tnnt nennt 12 18 12 8 1 Operation monitor sss enne trennen inne nnne enn 12 18 12 8 2 VO monitor nns 12 19 12 8 3 Graph monitor oe eee cee ceceee ee eeeeeeecaeceeeeeeeaeeaecaeceeeeaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeeaesaesaeseeeeaeeaeseneaneats 12 20 A1S63DA module monitor ce ceeeeaeeeecaeeeeeeaecaeceeseaesaesaeseeseaeeaesaeseessaesaeseseaeeeeneaeeaees 12 21 12 9 1 Operation monitor nennen 12 21 12 92 Simple oce ettet ete ete doe diaeta 12 22 12 9 9 NOMNO nee aa oaea e rope tro tte e ee d dete 12 23 AIS64DA module
8. P a x o hi 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 3 If a system program OS for the expanded or option functions has been installed the following space is required in the GOT built in internal memory to store user created monitor screen data Hence add the memory board as required The installation of an operating system is required for the following expended or option functions System monitor MELSEC ACPU ladder monitor MELSEC FXCPU ladder monitor e MELSEC QnACPU ladder monitor Special unit monitor recipe sound Network monitor e List editor ESC printer bar code report external key inpu PCL printer bar code report external key input e ESC printer bar code report proximity I O 8 e PCL printer bar code report proximity 3 1 Any one of the 3 types can be installed 2 The memory capacity is different from other OS It is considered as the installation of 2 operating systems 8 Any one of the 4 types can be installed Number of Extended Memory Space Used Free Space k bytes functions OSs k bytes te If the special module monitor function is being used enough memory space must be reserved in the internal memory to store the special module monitoring data see Section 3 3 3 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 1 3 Features The monitor functions described in this manual are intended to improve the efficiency of trouble shooting
9. Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display The set manual pulser run enabled disabled status is displayed 47 347 The set value of the M code is displayed 46 346 The set value of the comment for the M code is displayed 49 to 200 349 to 500 The data number during execution of current positioning is displayed 48 348 The remaining pointer value is displayed 39 339 The error code is displayed when an error occurs 45 345 The 8 bits where the status is saved are displayed in hexadecimal format When FF is displayed 1 display conditions 0 display conditions Zero return request During dwell time During positioning busy status except for zero return jog run manual pulser run Zero return complete Near signal on Drive module ready signal on Stop signal from drive module on Not condition at left 12 71 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 21 5 monitor SET Data MONIT 8D71 Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Chg menu ENP Inputs X Outputs Y NN WOT Error 10 0 HU X Posit Start READY 1 1 Y Posit Start X Posit Complete 2 a Interpolation Y Posit Completel3 3 X Zeroing Start X Axis BUSY 4 4 Y Zeroing Start Y Axis BUSY 5 5 X Ston 1
10. O 2 NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 10 32767 When comment is not displayed max 16 devices D 11 O Inventory quantity When comment is displayed max 8 devices D 12 O Shipment quantity Display when system monitoring D 13 1 Bit device ON 3 D 14 O Warehouse A temperature Word device Current value D 15 3 Warehouse B temperature D 16 0 D 17 O Production plan Displays the keys that are used with the operation of the Batch Monitor screen shown in 2 Touch input Displays the monitor station network No and station No Displays the status and current value of the monitor device The screen above shows when the monitor module is 16 bits 2 Key functions The chart below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the Batch Monitor screen operation Key Function Move to basic screen function change menu screen for changing to another monitor function or ending the system monitor See Sec 9 1 1 Move to display change menu screen for changing the numerical display on the Batch Monitor screen decimal hexadecimal or changing the comment display on off See Sec 9 1 2 Move to device setting menu screen to change the monitor device or execute a test e Change of monitor device See Sec 9 1 3 Test See Sec 9 6 Scroll the display up or down one line and display the monitor device
11. 11 12 13 14 15 Buffer memory address No f olen cheney to reference decimal The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 1 The calculated command pulse number PLS based on the command value is displayed i The actual amount of servo movement feedback pulse number PLS calculated from the feedback pulse is displayed i The difference between the command pulse number x CMS CDV and the feedback pulse number PLS is displayed i The set value PLS of the zero address is displayed 30 31 The set value of the zero return velocity is displayed 32 33 The set value of the creep velocity is displayed 34 35 After zero return starts the near zero point signal goes off decelerates and 8 stops The travel distance PLS from that point until zero return is complete 108 109 is displayed 9 After zero return starts the travel distance PLS from when the near zero 106 107 point signal goes on until zero return is complete is displayed The set value PLS of the travel distance after the near zero point signal 10 eid 36 37 goes ON is displayed The status of the control mode when changing modes from velocity to 11 position control is displayed 119 0 Positioning control in progress 1 Velocity control in progress 12 63 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer
12. 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT Chapter 21 Error Display and Corrective Actions for List Edit 21 1 Error detected with the list editor function If an error is detected with the list editor function during operation of each mode an error message appears at the 4th line of the display Error messages display conditions and corrective actions are displayed below If an error message appears take the following actions to resume operation 1 Check the error message 2 Remove the cause of the error 3 Input the corresponding key The error message disappears The screen returns to the status before error Example MPL o Reading the step with the RST command R 0p LD X0000 2 1 OR Y0020 2 ANI M100 NOT FOUND Display the error message p T E REPE EE Delete the error message The error message disappears The next operation is resumed 21 1 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT Display condition n machine language writing the address Address error which was tried to be written was at the Set the correct address write protect area No corresponding program The specified command was not found Check the program In communication with the CPU for clearing the keyword or writing the parameter the e Mount the memory cassette properly memory cassette is insufficient or not Replac
13. I 1 Control key 5 Command key upper character Device number constant set key lower character General description of function 1 Control key Key that declares start of step number input or automatic scroll SET Switch key that makes the lower character valid on each key with dual functions Whether upper or lower character is valid can be checked on the display Whether upper or lower character is valid can be checked on the display If the Clear key is pressed when the system is not in the Parameter mode Other mode or Help function the screen returns to the initial status of the mode selection The input commands or device numbers except for the mode are cleared This is used for repeating the procedure if incorrect keys are pressed In the Other mode the screen returns to the previous display When the Help function is used the screen returns to the display at the input of the HELP key Key that provides blank space at the command and at between device names Key that moves the cursor on the display gt If or determines scroll directions Press this key at the last of a series of key operations to execute the operation Check the details of key operations on the display before pressing this key 2 Mode key Fa 0 Key that selects each mode of the List editor function Se OTHER t Switch the upper lower character mode with the SHIFT
14. e s 1F I y E To Sec 13 2 13 1 13 OPERATING I O MODULE MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 13 2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions This section describes the configuration of monitor screens displayed by specifying the input module on the system configuration screen and explains the functions of the keys displayed on the screen 1 Display for an input module X MODULE 4 X Displays the statuses of input and output signals after being read out from the corresponding module OS executes it automatically Statuses for up to 64 can be displayed Signal statuses ON O OFF eeeeoooeeeeoooeo eeeeocoooeeeeoooo o 0000000008080000 eeeeoooeeeeoooeo Displays the type of the object module input or output module Displays the name of the signal being monitored X or Y Displays the number and status of the input or output signal Displays keys that are used with the operation of the monitor screen shown in 2 Touch input 2 Key functions The chart below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the Monitor Screen operation Function Monitoring ends and display returns to the screen where the special module monitor function was begun The current monitoring ends and returns to the system configuration Screen 13 2 14 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SPE
15. sse 21 1 21 2 vEmor ot PEG GRU s uds Lena tea te ted tu teat p ote dta und 21 4 21 3 Error using list editor function on the link system sssssneeneenenen nen 21 5 DEED PL Index 1 to Index 3 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT Chapter Overview This manual that can be used on a GOT with an operating system installed These functions include the utility function ladder monitor function system monitor function special module monitor function network monitor function and list editor function 1 1 Before getting started with various functions To use in this manual such as the utility function ladder monitor function system monitor function special module monitor function and network monitor function an operating system OS for each function must be installed first on your GOT by using drawing software To install an OS for your desired function on your GOT see SWAD5C GOTR PACKE V Operating Manual Drawing Software Manual 1 2 Precautions before use Precautions before using each function are described as follows 1 There are unavailable functions depending on the GOT Please note that some functions require extension memory in the GOT unit Memory is extended according to the following procedures For A985GOT A97 GOT A960GOT Memory board is installed in the GOT For A95 GOT A95 GOT BD M3 memory extension type is used A985GOT A960GOT TUAE
16. 2 12 91 12 23 9 Monitoring special startup jogging and manual pulser operation 12 92 12 23 10 Monitoring an origin point return eeseeseeseeeeeenennennnenenenennn 12 93 12 23 11 Monitoring axis control daarin a eena E EEE ATE EER EES 12 94 12 23 12 Monitoring the output speed rsson aaa AEEA 12 95 12 23 13 Monitoring the target values and machine 12 96 12 23 14 Monitoring external I O signals and status signals flags 12 97 12 23 15 Monitoring positioning information eseeseeeeeeeeeeeennennenenn 12 98 12 24 AJ71PT32 S3 and A1SJ71PT32 S3 module monitor ssssssssee 12 99 12 24 1 I O monitor mode esses enne nnne trennen tnnt 12 99 12 24 2 Monitoring the link Status eee eee eeeeeneeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas 12 100 12 24 3 Monitoring batch retreShing eeceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeenaeeeaeeeaeeeas 12 101 12 24 4 Monitoring separate refreshing sessseeeeneeneeeeneen nens 12 102 12 24 5 Monitoring input and output expansion 12 103 12 25 AJ71ID1 ID2 R4 and A1SJ711D1 ID2 R4 module monitor s
17. vro hii Display the monitor screen for the special module Check the data for the module with the displayed contents Change the current value of the specified area d Change the data 11 2 1 When starting the module format and related data are not displayed When reading of module data from the PLC CPU is complete the module format and related data is displayed See Sec 12 1 1 When END is selected the special module monitoring ends and the display moves to the original screen where the special module monitor function was begun See Secs 12 1 3 12 1 4 See Sec 12 1 4 gt The Special Module Monitor Screen is displayed by selecting it from the menu See Sec 12 1 4 See Sec 12 1 2 See Secs 12 2 to 12 27 Carry out the following operation when changing the 1 current values of the buffer memory that is displayed on the monitor screen See Sec 12 1 5 Touch the key where the touch switch expanded function was set with the drawing software and start the system monitor function When the Utility screen is displayed touch SP Mon to start the special module monitor function 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Chapter12 Operation of each special module monitor screen Each scr
18. Channel 3 0123 01234 01234 0 Sampling 0 Count Average 1 Averaging 1 Time Average Channel 4 0123 01234 01234 Contents of display The specified status for the averaging processing sampling processing of each of the channels is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing of each of the channels is displayed Buffer memory address to reference decimal 1 The values set for the time and number of times for averaging processing of each of the channels is displayed 2to5 When a temperature sensor input module is installed the offset values for each of the channels is displayed 32 34 36 38 When a temperature sensor input module is installed the gain values for each of the channels is displayed 12 108 33 35 37 39 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 26 3 I O monitor Data MONIT AS4AD Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Chg menu ENP Inputs X 10 AJ CH1 Enabled 11 CHe Enabled 12 CH3 Enabled me CH4 Enabled Error READY CHi Mod Fault CHe Mod Fault CH3 Mod Fault CH4 Mod Fault 14 15 17 18 1 1B 1D 1E 1F CH rm ul 7T TI Z C3 CD ID 4D CO J cn cn R co P3 P o nmo nwb 4D CO 1 0 O1 Contents of display The ON OFF status for t
19. 0 H Operation start warning TO 7 25 Ext PCRD Mon Menu ust 14 lt gt a Print Cancel Screen Print 1 Switching the display format The current values monitor of the word devices at the bottom of the screen are executed in decimal or hexadecimal format 2 Displaying device comments Comments of for the device used in the PLC program comments that are written into the PLC CPU are displayed When comments are displayed 3 lines of the program are shown 3 Monitoring other stations Other stations in data link systems network system or CC Link system including the GOT or stations connected to the GOT can be monitored 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 1 3 3 Features of the system monitor function Installing the screen monitor function operating system into the GOT built in memory using the drawing software enables monitoring and testing of the buffer memory for the PLC CPU program and the special functions module The features of the system monitor function are shown below 1 Any desired device can be monitored using 4 dedicated screens The system monitor function provides an entry monitor a batch monitor and a buffer memory monitor enabling monitoring of any device for complete flexibility in any application Entry monitor DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF 15 2147483648 DW D D 10 32767 X 001 e M 25 O Y 70
20. 12 24 12 10 41 12 24 12 10 2 WO monitor pedido ubt quida 12 25 12 10 3 Graph monitor cede dt eda d e D hides 12 26 A68AD module montor yira Ee t aariaa er de eere edes Poo aera Pc ads 12 27 12 31 41 Operation mohitor ioi eie tee ic lao e eee 12 27 12 11 25 VO MONIO tine tem team etenim etapa 12 28 1259 1 9 Graph molliter pp pers 12 29 A1S68AD module tmohltor ctt etn ee Pe dp e e Ee ee Ln is 12 30 12 12 1 Operation monitor nente nente trennen enne nnne 12 30 12 12 2 VO MONTO ii iniit eee cand e i Hen ie He acd Pe ced e decd LS 12 81 12 12 32 Graphi monitor uui aa cud d d adt ipa 12 32 AGBADN module Tmohitor Pe e PURI dide Pep o i S pi foe 12 33 1213 1 Operation mohlltOr oir rn rrr ee oe n gt aa 12 33 PASO monitor cd Am demie cts LS b 12 34 12 13 3 Graph monltor ioa n D ei ene mre td i elias 12 35 A68RD module monitor eese nennen innen 12 36 12 14 1 Operation monitor esses 12 36 12142 VO MON OE irn nen nr ne nne Ene E RO Ue EE ee DUM 12 37 12 14 37 Graph monitor ite piden ptite putent ud id ao ig 12 38 A1S68DAI A1S68DAV module monitor seessseeeeeee eene nnn
21. 5 0 0 0 Decel Time URL Mc c CEDE 2147483648 to 2147483647 OP Distance 10 1 6 410 5 inch E pis 01234567890 i 01284567890 01234567890 0 to 35999999 i 410 5 deg Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal Axis 3 The time from when the proximity dog goes ON to when the origin point return is completed is displayed for stopper stop 1 The restriction value used to limit the torque of the servomotor after reaching the creeping speed is displayed The amount of movement after the proximity dog goes ON is displayed for count equation The display shows which acceleration time O to 3 basically this is set using the detailed parameters is to be used as the acceleration time when making an origin point return The display shows which deceleration time 0 to 3 basically this 5 set using the detailed parameters is to be used as the deceleration time when making an origin point return 6 The shift amount amount of movement for an origin point shift 84 234 384 is displayed 85 235 385 12 87 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 6 Monitoring the error history and warning history SET Data MONIT END Error History Harning History RESET chg MENU Error History Warning History No Code Time N
22. The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 48 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 17 3 Graph monitor Ex eee Data MONIT R616DAI Graph Monitor Screen RESET ee eee MENU Output x 0 50 hannel hannel IT C3 C3 CB TD D CO 1 cn cn x Co P3 b A x hannel n n n n n n n nel 2 FEDCBA9S 76543210 a WOT Error D A Conversion 0110110110110110 0 Disabled I 3 Qutput Enable 0110110110110110 1 Enabled error Buffer memory address to TED ERN reference hexadecimal The current input value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital input value 1 of each channel is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from 0 to 10 to 1F 100 The set D A conversion enabled disabled status for each channel is displayed The set analog output enabled disabled status for each channel is displayed A E is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs i PP C LI For A616DAI A F is displayed when the digital input value of any channel is set to 4096 or higher or to a negative number For A616DAV A I is displayed when the digital input value of any channel is set to 4096 or higher or to 4097 or lower 12 49
23. 5 F F d Executing e Primary loop NG f MELSECNET 10 9 MELSECNET 10 loopback Secondary loop NG coaxial bus OK coaxial bus NG e Sia iF ARN R M lis 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Contents of Display The following loop status in the data link system is displayed Primary loop F Sub loop R a Data is linked in the b Data is linked in the sub Loop back is performed Primary loop in the Primary sub loop direction F _ d Loop back is performed Loop back is performed f Data link is not available in the Primary loop in the sub loop direction direction only 2 Key functions This section describes the function of keys to be used on the own station monitor Screen Function Exits the own station monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed Switches to the detailed monitor screen that corresponds to the module displayed on the current monitor screen This key is effective for each screen Switches to the other station monitor menu that corresponds to the network displayed on the current monitor screen This key is effective for each screen Changes the details on the window only for A95 GOT 17 2 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 2 Detailed own station monitor This section describes
24. Security Changing the security levels of numeric input If a security password is defined by using drawing Section 4 10 password and objects software security levels can be changed Password Defining a password for limited access to the Section 4 11 utility menu screen This function can be executed only when the GOT List edit List editing of PLC programs in PLC CPU memory is extended and the OS is installed from Chapter 19 the drawing software to the GOT Ladder monitor Section 4 8 Section 4 9 This function can be executed only when the GOT 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 2 Selecting the utility function This section describes how to select the utility function The utility function can be activated with a touch of the screen To select the utility function follow either of the following two steps 1 Touch the upper right and left corners of the screen at the same time Touch here simultaneously 2 Touch a touch key displayed on the monitor screen A touch key can be set in the touch key expanded function settings The following flowchart outlines the steps involved in selecting the utility function Touch after changing the setup data Touch key input
25. 15 1 Special module monitor function 11 1 System monitor function 8 1 List editor function 19 1 Other station monitor 17 9 Outside speaker sound 4 8 Own station monitor 17 1 P PaSSWOIG 4 aim adapted 4 15 Q QC24 connection transmission speed 4 8 Quick test function 9 19 QBUS extension number 4 8 QBUS slot 4 8 Index 1 IR Reading data from the PLC 6 1 Required equipment 2 1 Reverse 4 8 S Screen display and key functions Batch monitor oiaro aaan eaaa 9 11 BM monitor 9 15 Detailed own station monitor 17 8 Entry monitor sese 9 8 Ladder monitor function 6 14 Other station monitor 17 9 Special module monitor function 12 1 System monitor function 9 1 TC monitor 9 13 Screen cleanup 4 13 Screen amp OS copy 4 5 Screen save
26. to reference decimal The specified conversion enabled disabled status for each channel is displayed The Conversion Completed flag status for channels 1 and 2 is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing sampling processing of channels 1 and 2 is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing of channels 1 and 2 is displayed The values set for the time and number of times for averaging processing of channels 1 and 2 is displayed The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output value of channels 1 and 2 is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 Resolution selection 2 0 to 8000 3 0 to 12000 The upper limit of the digital value following D A conversion with channel 3 is displayed The lower limit of the digital value following D A conversion with channel 3 is displayed The set value of the digital value following D A conversion with channel 3 is displayed The digital value of channel 3 calculated by simple loop control is displayed The error code is displayed when a writing data error occurs The set resolution selection is displayed 12 21 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 9 2 Simple loop monitor MELSEC GOT SETZ Data MONIT amp 1S638D amp Simple Loop Control Monitor Screen RESET Che END Exec Enable 0 Disabled 1
27. Sys Cont END 4 Check the contents of the display Carry out the subsequent operation according to Sec TORRES AT UN A 12 2 to 12 27 woes un rae tt 5 Carry out tests for the displayed data according Rid p as to Sec 12 1 5 ret Change current value of buffer memory J p e Turn output signal from PLC CPU on and off sure qe Proceed to Sec 12 1 5 and Secs 12 2 to 12 27 12 4 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 1 5 Test for special function module D CAUTION e Read the manual carefully and fully understand the operation before the test operation modifying the current value of a buffer memory of special function module monitor In addition never modify data in a test operation to a device which performs a crucial operation to the system It may cause an accident by a false output or malfunction Testing can be performed for all buffer memory data displayed on the current monitor screen This section describes the operation for changing the current value of the buffer memory and turning the output signal from the PLC CPU to the special module on and off POINTS 1 When testing test for the buffer memory to be written in from the PLC CPU and the output signal that is output from the PLC CPU 2 Be sure to carry out the test operation with the PLC CPU in STOP status If the PLC CPU is test
28. merror iHi 2 14 15 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display The set manual pulser run enabled disabled status is displayed The set value of the travel distance per 1 pulse is displayed The set value of the travel distance per 1 pulse using the manual pulser is displayed The set value of the speed limit is displayed The set value of the jog speed limit is displayed The set value of the acceleration deceleration time is displayed The set value of the backlash compensation amount is displayed The set value of the upper stroke limit is displayed The set value of the lower stroke limit is displayed The set value of the error compensation amount is displayed The set value of the starting bias speed is displayed The set value of the positioning complete signal output time is displayed The set value of the M code is displayed 0 M code not used The error code is displayed when an error occurs The set status of the parameter data is displayed 12 76 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 22 4 M code comment monitor SET Data MONIT 8D72 819D71
29. If there is a at the upper left of the screen touching the returns to the monitor screen Operation procedure Display Device Monitor screen See Sec 9 2 2 ol Display device setting menu screen DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF DEVICE DELETE ALL CLR TEST CANCEL m Batch deletion Random deletion ALL CLR DELETE Touch either key E Display device deletion screen 1 Specify the device to be deleted Match the data to be enterd the touch key display at the bottom of the screen will change Select input area 1 Data being entered can be cleared by the following Character Input device name and no 1 keys AC Clears all data being entered to the object area F DEL Clears one character at the cursor position Touch Input confirmation Move return to Device Monitor screen 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 3 Batch monitor When monitoring the function of specifying the device at the beginning of an optional device range and monitoring it is called the batch monitor The batch monitor operation when executing the system monitor is explained below 9 3 1 Basic operation The batch operation procedure is shown below See Sec 9 1 1 Operation procedure Select
30. Abbreviations generic terms and Description special terms Printer interface unit Abbreviation of A9GT 50PRF type printer interface unit ACPU Large Type Generic term of ANUCPU AnACPU and AnNCPU CPU units A1SJ H CPU Generic term of A1SJCPU S3 and A1SJHCPU CPU units A2US H CPU Generic term of AAUSCPU A2USCPU S1 and A2USHCPU S1 CPU units ACPU Small Generic term of A2US H CPU AnS H CPU and A1SJ H CPU CPU units AnNCPU Generic term of ATNCPU A2NCPU A2NCPU S1 and A83NCPU CPU units AnS H CPU Generic term of ATSCPU A1SHCPU A2SCPU and A2SHCPU CPU units i ACPU Generic term of ACPU Large Type ACPU Small Type and A1FXCPU CPU units Generic term of series CPU unit Generic term of FXON series CPU unit FXO0S series Generic term of FX0S series CPU unit Generic term of FX2NC series CPU unit Generic term of series FXON series series FX1 series FX1S series FX series FX2C series FX2N series FX2NC series CPU unit A171SCPU S3 A171SHCPU A172SHCPU CPU unit Generic term of C200HS C200H C200HX C200HG C200HE CQM1 C1000H C2000H CV1000 Omron PLC CPU unit Generic term of GL60S GL60H GL70H GL120 GL130 CP 9200SH CP 9300MS MP 920 MP 930 dius CP 9200 H and PROGIC 8 CPU unit Allen Bradley PLC Generic term of SLC 5 03 SLC 5 04 CPU unit MEME Generic term of JW 21CU JW 22CU JW 31CUH JW 32CUH JW 33CUH JW 50CUH JW 70CUH JW 100CUH
31. Directory Tree ALARMHST DAT Alarm history data file RECIP001 CSV to Recipe data files RECIP256 CSV Dbist inl mmm Downloaded information data file NOS Folder for GOT OS program files I SYSTEM UserData mm8 Folder for on screen data files L Folder for special module monitor data files e Backup copies of screen data files are saved to the UserData folder To delete a file from the memory card by operating from the GOT perform a memory card check one of the options of the utility function After the memory card check is complete the memory card will be formatted To delete a file from the memory card by operating from the personal computer install a memory card on the GOT and use the Explorer to delete the file Since an OS and data are controlled by the Dlist ini file create a memory card by using OS Install or OS Download of drawing software When data is copied by using the Windows explorer on the personal computer side the data cannot be recognized by the GOT POINTS You cannot use this function to install the OS from memory card to internal memory For details of OS installation refer to the Help function of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 5 Setting the operating environment of the GOT Setup After changing any of the items in Setup touching automatically resets the GOT and shows the monito
32. FIER Covel Bis ieu Bip uem is displayed 71 W Up down P 4 Left right 2 Use the numeric keys to specify the value to be changed 2 The DEL key can be used to clear individual characters among those input Touch input confirmation Test continues Test ends SET When is touched tests the I O signal t iTouch RESET anal 1 All of the following operations can be carried out by touching 2 the keys in the displayed key window e When you touch at the upper left of the key window the key window closes and the display returns to the monitor Screen 1 Use the alphabetic character keys to specify the name of the device to be tested and then touch 1 2 Use the numeric keys to specify the device number and then touch gt 8 Use the numeric keys to specify Set or Reset 0 OFF 1 ON 1 Do not perform the following tests When testing the module may not operate correctly or the buffer memory input signal may return to the output value output status from the special function module 1 Test the buffer memory for reading only from the PLC CPU 2 Test the input signal to the PLC CPU from the special function module 2 When testing buffer memory data specify the change value in the following way 1 For data where 16 32 bits is displayed with one number specify the change value in decimal 2 For data where one number o
33. 12 21 4 M code comment monitor SET Data MONIT 071 M Code Comment Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END 3 i x Y X fixis M Code bio Y Axis M Code 012 X Axis start 01 ABCOEFGHIJKLMNOP RBEDEFGHIJKLMMOP Executing Interpolation 02 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Data No 012 I 5 Posit Compl 03 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP BBCDEFGHIJKLMNOP 04 i ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Pointer 012 6 1 Zero Request 05 ABCOEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Zero Start 06 i ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Error Code 012 7 Zero Complete 07 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP 08 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLHNOP Status 012 8 Fud Jog Start 09 ABCDEFG4 JKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Rev Jog Stant 10 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Y Axis 1 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Stop 2 i ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Executing 13 i ABCDEFGHTJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Data No 012 Pos Started 14 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP BUSY 5 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Pointer 012 M Code ON amp ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP 7 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Error Code 012 WDT Err Man Pulse 18 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Batt ErrX Hi 3 i ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Status 012 Error iHi
34. Operation procedure When there is a at the upper left of the screen touch it to return to the original screen Ext PLCRD Mon Menu List f Vell 5 ar Pim EN dE EIS When the screen below is currently displayed it is not Screen Print necessary to touch this y MENU Touch 0025 by mas Bee sone Touch the appropriate display position on the ladder Edi ETE Mor enw Cont Sea End Sea 110 160 monitor menu Print Coil Sea Fact Sea Test Cmnt Sareen After moving to the ladder monitor screen the word device value is Mon when you touch Mon Y Y Change display form Change comment display 10 16 Dec Hex Touch Cmnt Touch Move to circuit monitor screen When changing to hexadecimal display When changing to comment display STEP 12345 18374 STEP 12345 18374 PLS M910 Character ON string i dispaly 4 0023 Ready Start Operation display operation ready instruction K K25 14 4 210 CALL P2 FUR Ti TO 7 warning 0007 0000 25 0019 0032 Ext PLcRD mon menu us 4 4 fa Ex mon ve o 4 3 lt 5 E Print Cancel
35. Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the secondary loop e of Loop Switching Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched ig displayed when coaxial bus connections are established 17 9 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Section TsSt Sta 2 Key functions Contents of Display e Parameter Setting Not displayed Reserved Sta Indicates the availability of a reserved station Have None Communication Mode Indicates either of Normal mode or Constant LS e Transmission Mode Indicates either of Normal Trans or Multipl trans e Transmission Stat Indicates either Normal Trans or Multipl trans ox x is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed own station monitor screen Key Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the detailed own station monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed Changes the details on the window only for A95 GOT 17 10 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS 17 3 Other station monitor MELSEC GOT This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the other station monitor 17 3 1
36. SET Data MONIT a1S68DAv Movement Monitor Screen RESET Che Menu END H 87654321 0 Enabled Analog Output 01101101 1 1 Disabled MD Output Status Up Limit Lou Limit CH 1 012345 7 o CH 2 012345 7 e e CH gc O12545 7 e CH 4 012345 7 e o CH 5 2 012345 7 i 3 a 4 CH 6 012345 7 i e o CH TH 012345 7 o CH 12345 7 o Up Low Limit O0 DK 1 Error Buffer memory address No f ad to reference decimal The analog output enabled disabled status for each channel is displayed ram LUNAM For A1S68DAI The present input value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital input value of each channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 For A1868DAV The present input value a value between 2000 to 2000 for the digital input value of each channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 When the digital input value set for each channel is greater than the allowable value 1 is displayed When the digital input value set for each channel is less than the allowable value 1 is displayed 12 39 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 15 2 I O monitor SETZ Data MONIT ALS68DAY Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che menu ENP x HDT Error 10 0 HN CH1 Enable 1 Ready 1 1 M CH2 Enable Error Detect 2 2 Ra CHS Enable 3 13 3 CH4 Enable 4 4 4 s CH5 Enable 5 5 5 ME CHG Enable 6
37. to the previous monitor screen Display device setting menu screen DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK 0 STATION FF DEVICE DELETE ALL CLR TEST m When you touch CANCEL the display moves returns to the previous monitor screen Y Touch Y Display test menu screen DEVICE MONITOR MENU FORM SET NETWKNo 0 STATION FF SET RST VALUE16 BM VAL16 SET VAL VALUE32 BM VAL32 9 16 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS Select test item When SET RST is selected mh NETWKNo STATION DEVICE RST 0 SET 1 xX YM 5 lt gt BF AC DEL E When VALUE16 VALUE32 is selected c NETWKNo STATION DEVICE VLIK 4 2 v A Z T A V C DEL Ld Arrow Select input area lt Character Enter network No station No device name device No test value Touch input confirmation Move return to screen where SET was specified MELSEC GOT 1 Touch either depending on test contents SET RST SET RST set reset bit device VALUE16 or
38. zero Reques 16 6 Y Stop Y zero Reques 7 7 X Fwd Jog Start X Posit Started 18 a x Rev Jog Start Posit Started 19 3 IE Y Fwd Jog Start a Battery Error A A Y Rev Jog Start ME Error Detection B X M Code OFF NN zero Complete JLC E HM M Code OFF NN zero Complete D D NE PLC READY X M Code ON E E 1E Y M Code ON LF F AF The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 72 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 21 6 Positioning data monitor The positioning Data Monitor Screen No 1 is used as an example SET Data MONIT amp D71 Positioning Data Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END Address Speed Dwell M Code Address Speed Duell M Code 001 01234567 01294 012 012 001 01234567 01294 012 012 0 002 01234567 01234 012 012 0 002 01234567 01294 012 012 0 003 01234567 01294 012 012 0 003 01234567 01234 012 012 0 004 01234567 01234 012 012 0 004 01234567 01234 012 012 0 005 01234567 01234 012 012 005 01234567 01234 012 012 0 006 01234567 01234 012 012 0 006 01234567 01294 012 012 0 007 01234567 01294 012 012 007 01234567 01294 ole 012 0 008 01234567 01234 012 012 0 008 01234567 01294 012 012 0 009 01234567 01294 012 012 0 003 01234567 012934 012 012 0 010 01234567 01234 012 012 0 010 01234567 01234 012 012 0 011 01234567 01294 012 01 0 011 0
39. 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 18 A616TD module monitor 12 18 1 Operation monitor INPUT 0 h amp i5TD Operation Monitor Screen INPUT 0 Channel Mo FEDCBASS 76543210 Error Code 01 3 1 Conversion 0110110110110110 E nable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Error FEDCBR38 76545210 CNT No 0110119110110110 Channel No FEDCBASSTES43210 2 T Data Format 0110110110110110 Sampling Time 01234 ms 5 Input Status For Data Format 0 Refer to left hand side values 8 Format 1 Refer to right hand side values CH Q 01234 6 01234 6 CH 8 01234 6 01234 6 CH 1 01234 6 01234 6 CH 9 O1234 5 01234 65 2 01234 65 01234 6 A 01234 65 01234 65 3 01234 65 6 01234 6 01234 65 6 01234 65 CH 4 01294 65 01234 6 CH 01234 6 01234 65 CH 5 01294 6 01234 6 CH D 01234 6 01234 65 B 01294 6 01234 6 01234 6 01234 6 CH 7 1234 5 01234 6 F 01254 6 012354 6 Bb obigital value Error Bb enp Values Error BE discontinuity Error 7 8 9 Buffer memory address to Concur creep ey reference hexadecimal The specified D A conversion enabled disabled status for each channel is displayed The set status of the data format for each channel is displayed 0 An error code is displayed when an error occurs 1 1 is displayed for CNT No when an error with error code 01 to
40. 12 11 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 4 2 I O monitor SET Data MONIT A18D61 Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che menu END nputs X Outputs Y WOT Error ME Count Enable CH1 LS Dutpu 1 1 Decrement Count CH2 LS Outpu 2 2 Preset Command CH3 LS Outpu 3 3 Ring Counter 1 CH4 LS utpu 14 4 Counter Functio CHS LS Dutpu 5 5 LS Output CH6 LS Dutpu 6 6 Reset Preset CH LS Dutpu T 7 Error Reset LS Dutpu 8 8 LS DZP Enable 3 3 Ext Preset A A Error Flag B B Fuse Power OFF E E Sampling Period 1D D E E F F No Contents of display The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 12 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 5 A62DA S1 module monitor 12 5 1 Operation monitor SET Data MONIT A62DA 81 Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che menu END Channel 1 Output Yoltage check 0123 Channel 2 Output voltage check 0123 01234 6 X 1 Current check 2 0123 01234 6 X 1 Current check 2 0123 Inputs X Dutputs Y WOT Error 0 3 READY 1 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 7 T 7 T 8 8 8 8 3 3 E 9 A A A A B B B Output Enable E E G D D D D E E E E F F F F Buffer memory address to r
41. END n E END ions n Normal a ok dd 8 OK is RLoop Normal MEM F Loop Back Station aes E RH EE 20 D Link Info RLoop Back Station uae l d oki OK Lad J ok Total of L Sta 3 25 26 EE 30 E OK L d OK ER ES ERE EA se EB 40 lj OK Lnd i OK EE anl BEd 6 Eso OK Lab OK Lail OK dl EEs 52 Ess EB 55 EE se EE El eo d OK dg OK dd OK da OK Lad OK Li OK Lnd d OK 8 2 Ries 064 16 1 16 SWITCHING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT MEMO 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Chapter17 Using the network monitor screens This chapter describes how to use various monitor screens when you execute the network monitor function 17 1 Own station monitor This section describes the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the own station monitor 17 1 1 Display contents and keys functions own station monitor This section describes the own station monitor screen and the function of on screen keys all of which are displayed and used when executing the network monitor function 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is u
42. Key Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station parameter status monitor screen and returns to END the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 14 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 5 Display contents and keys functions other station CPU action status monitor This section describes the other station CPU action status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys This option is not selectable when connecting to a remote I O network system 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 m 960GOT E EE Gis Display example iok Ul zs 25 Eos E so m cru uniti ReT eNo 3 Ok di L L L j EE iss EE d FE FREE EE 40 12345678 910 fox Li d ok Ega ER E46 ER Eas ESO OK Ldd j l l Iri Iri eer ico iomele Semele 191 Biss 8 6 EM s7 Mss fM 5 M 60 0 d ok 0 fees mea Jok F Iri No Contents of Display 1 Station numbers are shown up to the maximum number of linked stations Any station that stays in an abnorma
43. QnACPU Direct CPU connection ACPU MELSECNET connection 1 Motion Computer link connection controller CC Link connection cpu FXCPU CPU direct connection x x x Other manufacture s PLC 1 When connected to a QnACPU control and master stations cannot be monitored 2 When connected to an ANUCPU monitoring cannot be done with the MELSECNET 10 network card being installed 3 When connected to a QnACPU monitoring cannot be done with the keyword being defined 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 5 List editor function specifications POINTS To use the List editor function on the A985 97 960GOT the memory board is required To use the List editor function on the A95 GOT the A95 GOT BD M3 memory extension type is required 3 5 1 PLC CPU that allows for list edit PLC CPUS that allow list edit are either the QCPU A mode or the ACPU For details refer to section 1 2 2 a With the computer link connection the above PLC CPUs do not allow use of the List editor function In using the A2USH S1 A2SH S1 A2SH A1SH A1SJHCPU the following restrictions should be observed in the range of list edit In using the AAUSHCPU S1 In the range of the ASUCPU In using the A2SH S1 A2SH A1SH A1SJHCPU In the range of the ASNCPU 3 5 2 Access range that allows for list edit For information about the access range that allows for list edit see Chapter 2 of the GOT A900 Series User s manual SW4D5C
44. Sensor Error 4 4 4 Rev Jog Start 5 ME Correction Err e5 5 n5 LS Enable 6 Mg Position Error E6 6 H6 J Error Reset 7 Error 7 7 M7 P1 Disable 8 a CH 0 8 Status 8 8 18 P2 Disable 3 WR CH 1 9 Status 3 3 19 A a CH 2 10 Status BA A 1 B CH 3 11 Status PB B B C MM CH 4 12 Status gc C Hc D Mi CH 5 13 Status gD D 4D E CH 6 14 Status PE E F CH 7 15 Status EF F The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 17 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 8 A1S62RD module monitor 12 8 1 Operation monitor Data MONIT BlS62RD Operation Monitor Screen RESET Chg menu ENO Temp Vvalue C Temp Value C Time Disabled Enabled 21 16 bits 32 bits Count 0110110110110110 4 1 0123 5 1 0123 567 2 3 01234 1 Enabled 0 Disabled 2 0123 5 0123 567 01234 Conversion 21 0110110110110110 5 1 Completed 0 Not Completed Average sample Time Count 21 21 0110110110110110 _ 6 7 1 Averaging 1 Time Average 0 Sampling 0 Count Average 1 Disconnection detection WCH Disconnection detection Error Temp Sensor Type 0 8 Error Code 012345 0 JIS DIN 1 014 JIS Buffer memory address contents to reference decimal Th
45. Startup data pointer Information Command code of the special startup data specified by the startup data pointer Parameter Parameters for the special startup data specified by the startup data pointer Data No Positioning data number specified by the startup data pointer The jogging speed used during jogging operation is displayed The input magnification per one pulse from the manual pulser is displayed The display shows whether or not manual pulser operation is permitted 12 92 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 10 Monitoring an origin point return SET Data MONIT ADTSP Original Point Return RESET che MENU EMP ie ee Axist Axis Axis3 Absolute 3107 1 RE 1 Original MEE 01234567890 01234567890 01234567890 Point PLS 1 Travel Distance rure 2 MEC x10 5 deg 01294567830 01234567890 01234561690 PLS Torque Limit imitLowerL imit Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal Axis 2 The address of the origin point set when an origin point return is completed is displayed The amount of movement after the proximity dog goes ON is displayed The torque limit value is displayed The ON OFF status of the external I O signal corresponding to the signal name displayed on the screen is displayed OFF ON Bitib to 76543210 Zero point signal Proximity s
46. F Features Ladder monitor function 1 8 Network monitor function 1 14 Special module monitor function 1 12 System monitor function 1 10 Utility function sees 1 6 List editor function ss 1 16 Function list 1 2 Functions requiring a memory board 1 1 G Grip SWItCh iiti 4 9 H Host FF 4 8 How to display the utility menu 4 2 Human sensor detection sensitivity 4 9 Human sensor function 4 9 Human sensor OFF delay 4 9 L Ladder monitor function 1 8 Ladder read operation 6 4 List editor function 1 16 M Memory capacity of OS 1 5 Memory information 4 11 Message display 4 8 Microcomputer connection protocol 4 8 Microcomputer connection transmission speed 4 8 N Network monitor function 1 14 O Operation for defect search 6 10 Operation procedures Ladder monitor function 5 1 Network monitor function
47. Key that selects the help function in the mode supporting the help function Command key Key that inputs K H at the input of command device name and constant input Advice key Only when the valid key of upper lower character needs to be switched switching is allowed with input of the SHIFT and SET keys Command key DEVICE Only when the valid key of upper lower character needs to be switched switching is No Constant 0 allowed with input of the SHIFT SET Setting key Key that inputs the command device number and constant keys 3 11 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT Movement of the cursor key between steps between the menu items and in the input area is explained below 1 Keep pressing the cursor key to repeat the movement toward the specified key direction 2 Movement between steps and between menu items To display the program immediately before after the current step number command Input either key Program immediately before the command no change after 0 step Program immediately after the command no change after the last step R 0 X0005 2 2 gt moves to the specified direction upward downward with or key 3 Movement in the input area To move the cursor between command names between sources and between destinations input either or key W 1
48. PV 25 SV PV 100 SV PV 05 55900000 AAAAAAASA Change the screen display Do if needed For the display change method see Sec 9 1 2 9 12 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 4 2 TC Monitor screen display and key functions In this section the TC Monitor screen display contents and the function of keys displayed at the top of the screen are explained 1 Display TC MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET ID NETWK No 0 FILE ABCDEF PRG STATION 33 T 1 1 1 0 PV Production line A 1 PV Production line B 2 PV Production line C 3 PV SV When comment is not displayed max 8 devices When comment is displayed max 4 devices E o 1f Display when system monitoring T C current value set value oe Contact point coil amp 9 ON it OH OFF 0 SV Production line D Displays the keys that are used with the operation of the TC Monitor screen shown in 2 Touch input Displays the monitor station network No and station No When connected to QnACPU the execution file name is displayed If there are more than one file the first file name is displayed 2 Key functions bits Displays the current value set value contact point and coil status of the monitor device The screen above shows when the monitor module is 16 The chart below shows the fun
49. Utility menu Selection Monitor screen Contrast adjustment PLC MON gt SP UNIT DATA COPY F N SETUP I SELF CHECK I MEMORY INFO I LADDER MON I TIME SET gt CLEAN Am 1 If you have set the password for the utility gt PASSWORD menu the utility menu will appear after you enter the password NET MON For the way of entering the password refer to Section 4 11 2 How to adjust the brightness contrast E EE LIST EDITOR differs with the GOT used 0 For more information refer to Section 4 3 3 Changing any setting in Setup and gt Brightness adjustment touching resets the GOT and returns to Touch the monitor screen 4 Not available on the A95 GOT 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 3 Selecting the required function on the utility menu screen Adjusting the brightness contrast of the monitor screen 1 Display screen The display screen differs with the GOT used Screen Example A985 97 960GOT A95 GOT E B uou i EI tn amp kaj Ei el PLE LIST MEMORY SELF PLE NET LIST LADDER SP MON MON EDITOR INFO CHECK MON EDITOR MON UNIT 2 m ma B Ls L1 DATA SET TIME CLEAN PASS WORD DATA TIME CLEAN PASS SELF copy SET COPY UP HORD CHECK a Es i 20 PLC MET LIST LRDDER SP MEMOR MON MON EDITOR MON UNIT INFO
50. VALUE32 Change current value of word device SET VALUE Change T or C set value BM VAL16 or VAL32 Change current value of buffer memory With VALUE16 or BM VAL16 16 bits is the object module With VALUE32 or BM VAL32 32 bits is the object module When SET VALUE is selected NETWKNo STATION DEVICE JI VLIK lt gt TIC T A AC DELI 4l 2 Specify the network No and station No of the object PLC CPU See Sec 9 1 3 1 For data link system Network No 0 Station FF Own station 0 Master station 1 to 64 Local station For network system Network No 0 Host loop 1 to 255 Specify loop Station FF Own station 0 Control station 1 to 64 Normal station 8 Specify object device 4 Specify test value With SET RST set reset of bit device specify 0 RST or 1 SET When changing current value of word device When changing T or C set value or When changing current value of buffer memory Match current display form decimal hexadecimal and specify change value 3 9 17 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 1 The data being entered can be cleared by using the following keys AC Clear all data being entered in the object area DEL Clear one character from the cursor position 2 The format for the data be
51. With the drawing software transmit the Transmit the data using the download dialog box special module monitor data from the personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory Download When download is finished the special When download is finished Completed is displayed module monitor can be operated through the on the download dialog box GOT Drawing software operation is finished Proceed to Section 12 2 to operate the special module monitor 11 1 11 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 11 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of special module monitor This section describes the operation procedure for the GOT when starting each operation of the special module monitor function after the system program OS of the special module monitor function has been installed in the GOT built in memory and downloading the special module monitor data Install memory board on the GOT v Start up GOT v Display the use created monitor screen y Start the special module monitor function ss Display the system configuration screen System Configuration NETWK No 0 PLC STATION FF MAIN cpu oure w e vo kys m SP Ext 1 ourse uri 5215 vio
52. ex 8 el 46 DATA SET TIME CLEAN PASS SELF cory ur SET HORD CHECK n E nil PLC NET LIST LADDER SP MON MON EDITOR MON UNIT bax amp 4e DATA SET TIME CLEAN PASS SELF UP SET WORD CHECK 2 Function Menu screen used to select any of the utility functions Used to adjust the brightness contrast of the monitor screen 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 8 Operation a Basic operation Directly touch the portion where the function you will select is being displayed b Return to the monitor screen Touch E to return to the monitor screen c Brightness contrast adjustment Touch XE 3 and at top of the screen to make contrast adjustment You can adjust the contrast in about 20 steps e Touch Ld at top right of the screen to show the brightness adjustment dedicated screen For details of the adjustment method on the dedicated screen refer to section 4 12 POINTS If the OS is not installed on the GOT items are displayed on the system monitor but they cannot be selected If the memory board is not installed in the GOT or the OS is not installed on the GOT items are displayed on the special unit monitor the ladder monitor and the network monitor of the A985 97 960GOT but they cannot be selected If the compatible model A95 GOT BD M3 is not used or the OS is not installed on the GOT items are dis
53. x o J o Data link status of each station 0o Parameter status of each station 0o i 39 1 Other station monitor epuaation status ofeachstation o o o x CPU RUN status of each staton o o o o x Loop status of each staton o o j 1 Accessible only when connected to a MELSECNET lI local station 2 Accessible only when connected to a MELSECNET 10 optical fiber cable Accessible Not accessible 3 8 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 4 2 Access ranges to be monitored For access range for monitoring see Chapter 2 of the GOT A900 Series User s manual SW4D5C GOTR PACKE compatible Connection system manual 3 4 3 Precautions when using the network monitor function The following describes precautions that should be followed when using the network monitor function 1 When the GOT is connected to an ANNCPU or AnACPU a screen display shows a screen of the MELSECNET II network even when you are connected to the MELSECNET 10 network the monitor screen shows the display contents of the MELSECNET II 2 There may be a possibility that the network monitor function cannot be used depending on which CPU to connect and which connection method to use Network Monitor Function CPU to Be Detailed Own Connection Method Own Station Other Station Connected Station Monitor Monitor Monitor QCPU Bus connection
54. 01 012 012 11 Start Exec Data No 012 Pt 01 012 Pt 01 02 012 012 Interpolationp Bgpec E 03 012 012 Posit Compl Present Value 0123456789 0123456789 04 O12 012 cete id c 6945 O5 12 Dia 1 We Zero Request Change Value 123456189 i 0123456789 06 012 012 BRO Start pecs ete mmm ya er pc diua 07 012 012 b sero Complete zero Address 0123456789 0123456789 012 012 p 09 012 012 Fud Jog Start Output speed 8 01234567 01234567 10 012 017 Jog ee 1012 012 Speed Limit 9 01234567 01234567 12 012 012 A Stop eS d o X 3 012 012 Speed Change i 01234567 01234567 14 012 012 poen m ge ee A 5 012 012 Jog Speed 01234567 01234567 16 012 012 Deed NR D PU eMe 17 012 012 Jog Spd Limiti 01234567 01294567 18 O12 012 WDT Err Man Pulsep jeere Reeve 9 012 012 Batt ErrX Mi MCode ErrCode 012 01 o12 01 20 012 012 Error N Hi i i 2 13 14 15 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display The set manual pulser run enabled disabled status is displayed 347 The data number during execution of current positioning is displayed 348 The remaining pointer value is displayed 339 604 605 341 342 7922 7923 The set value of the output speed is d
55. 12 25 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 10 3 Graph monitor SETZ Data MONIT A1S64AD Graph Monitor Screen RESET Che ENP Resolution 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 Input IX o 50 100 o 50 100 o 50 100 Channel 1 Channel 2 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Resolution Setting 0 B co B oT Error 2 3 4 l Buffer memory address ponents or to reference decimal The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output value of each channel is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from 10 to 13 0 to 100 Resolution selection 2 0 to 8000 3 0 to 12000 The set resolution selection is displayed 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 A is displayed when a writing data error occurs A E is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs 12 26 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 11 A68AD module monitor 12 11 1 Operation monitor SETZ Data MONIT AGSAD Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che END Samp le Average Time Count Sample Average Count Time 1 Channel No 8765492 187654321 0 Sampling O Count Average 2 Setting 0110110110110110 1 Averaging 1 Time Average Count Time nput Status Value x No of Channels Used 9 I 5 Channel 1 01294 01234 6 Channel 2 01234 01234 6 Writing
56. 20 1 2 Command input procedures 20 2 20 1 3 Action if an incorrect key is input ssssssseseneeneenenee nennen nennen nennen 20 6 20 2 Basic operation OF list edit 1 2 E AAAA EAE AEN reps 20 7 20 2 1 Reading sequence program aknen aen 20 7 20 2 2 Changing overwriting command sse ener enne 20 8 20 2 3 Adding inserting command esssssseseeeeeeeenneennee nennen 20 9 20 2 4 Deleting command 2 iine aen e Lade iL er Eae o Loue 20 10 20 2 5 Using Help f rictioni 1 1n c cn Lee Lee Lace a a n d ans 20 11 20 3 Operation procedure list of list edit nennen 20 13 20 53 13 COMMOM operatioi s she Ett n eL 20 13 20 3 2 Operation in Write mode W sssssssssssseseseseeeee nennen nnne nnne nnne nnne 20 13 20 3 3 Operation in Read mode R ssssssssssssssessssseee enne enne tnnt 20 14 20 3 4 Operation in Insert mode l sss nnne nnne nnne 20 14 20 3 5 Operation in Delete D mode nennen nnne 20 14 20 3 6 Operation in Parameter mode 22 20 15 20 3 7 Operation in Other MOdeS 20 16 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT 21 1t021 6 21 1 Error detected with the list editor function
57. 70 12 21 4 M code comment nennen nennen nnne 12 71 12 21 5 VO Month eee e d i de a eee 12 72 12 21 6 Positioning data Monto nennen nennen 12 73 AD72 A1SD71 module monitor esssseseeseeeeee nnnm nnne 12 74 12 22 14 Positioning monitor itta retener 12 74 12 22 2 Zero return monitor nennen nennen nennen nnne 12 75 12 22 3 Parameter data monitor nennen nennen 12 76 12 22 4 M code comment monitor rta aaa itir AE nennen nennen 12 77 12 22 5 MONON etie o ite a nadie eatur esi taedis ec iin 12 78 12 22 6 Positioning data monitor 12 79 AD75 A1SD75 module monitor eessseseeesseeeeeeennnen nennen enne nnns 12 80 12 23 1 VO monitors so ii WO ed oe ene d i ene de t en ee es 12 80 12 23 2 Operation monitor enne tnnt nnne nne 12 81 12 23 3 Basic parameter monitor sse nennen nennen 12 82 12 23 4 Extended parameter monitor sess 12 84 12 23 5 Zero return parameter monitor nennen 12 86 12 23 6 Monitoring the error history and warning history eeeeee 12 88 12 23 7 Monitoring the error termporary startup history and startup 12 89 15 13 14 15 16 12 23 8 Monitoring Speed Position 1
58. A9GT 80LTT Type Back light Unit User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of A9GT 80LTT with 80 A9GT 70LTT Type Back light Unit User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of ASGT 70LTT with ASGT 70LTT A9GT 70LTS Type Back light Unit User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of A9GT 70LTS with A9GT 70LTS A9GT 70LTTB Type Back light Unit User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of A9GT 70LTTB with ASGT 70LTTB A9GT 50LT type backlight User s Manual Describes specifications and operation of ASGT 5OLT with A9GT 50LT A9GT 80STAND User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of ABGT 80STAND with ASGT 80STAND A9GT 70STAND User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of A9GT 70STAND with ASGT 70STAND A9GT 50STAND User s Manual Describes specifications and operation of ASGT 50STAND with ASGT 50STAND Manual number Model code 66761 13708 18 68955 13JM89 18 68956 13JM90 1B 0800022 13038 18 66438 13JE26 18 66439 13JA81 18 66558 13JE94 18 66838 13 56 18 66788 13129 18 80027 1373021 18 68982 13JM97 18 68984 13JM99 18 80033 137025 1 0800020 137029 80028 13JQ22 18 68981 13JM96 1B 0800021 13JQ30 Add on memory board for ASGT FNB A9GT FNB1M A9GT FNB2M A9GT FNB
59. DEC NETWKNo 0 STATION FF DEC DEVICE M 0 RST 0 SET 1 1 DEVICE D 0 VL K 2147483648 718 9 4 7 18 9 AJ B E 41516 4 15 1 2113 1 2 0 DEL 0j 1 Test for bit device Device specified by user is turned on or off 2 Test for word device Writes designated value into device specified by user 3 Test for timer counter Writes in designated value as current value or set values of device specified by user 4 Test for buffer memory Writes designated value into buffer memory specified by user 3 Display format can be changed and device comments can be displayed see Section 9 1 2 for details Sample display For entry monitor For batch monitor comment display hexadecimal display DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWKNo 0 STATION FF BATCHMONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWKNo 0 STATION FF D 200 0 10 H 7FFF 18 FEOC Line 1 current units 200 43 11 H 0000 D 19 0CA2 12 H 0000 D 20 H 0000 13 FFFFD 21 H 0000 14 H 0000 D 22 H 0000 15 H 0003 D 23 H 8000 16 H 0000 D 24 0000 17 H 0000 D 25 H 0000 w Production line A R 50 68378428 DW link status 1 e Input switch 3 1 1 Changing display format The word device values for the entry monitor batch monitor T C monitor and the buffer memory monitor are monito
60. Enabled Point Channel 1 Channel 3 1 11 Coordinate Coordinate Control Made 012345 4 5 0 012345 012345 0 Normal 1 012345 012345 1 y AKL BE2 E 2 012345 012345 2 y AKI C 3 012345 042545 Ke 4 012345 012345 2 3 Coordinate Designation 5 012345 012345 5 012945 012345 A B Constant T 012345 012345 u CH3 OYA Digital Value 8 012345 012345 CH1 Digital Value 3 012945 012345 Ke CHE A D Digital Value Constant A 012 45 3 Constant B 012 45 Number of Points 0 6 Constant C 042545 Error Code 012 Resolution Setting 0 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 displayed Contents of display The specified simple loop control execution enabled disabled status is Buffer memory address to reference decimal The control mode set status is displayed 6 The set value of the simple loop control constant is displayed 7 8 9 displayed The set values of channel 1 coordinates that were set in each point are displayed The set values of channel 3 coordinates that were set in each point are 18 to 37 displayed The number of coordinate points of the simple loop control that was set is The error code is displayed when a writing data error occurs The set resolution selection is displayed 12 22 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 9 3 I O monitor SET Data MONIT ALS63ADA Input Output Monitor Screen RESET C
61. Search results are continuously displayed on screen until Esc is touched The ON OFF display of the last searched ladder does not appear on screen 6 12 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 1 4 Changing from one screen to another This section describes the screen movements when executing the ladder monitor from the status where the user created monitor screen is displayed Start User created monitor screen Touch Utility screen Touch Exit Touch LADDER MON 1 Touch the key where the touch switch expanded function was set with the graphics software and start the system monitor function When the Utility screen is displayed touch LADDER MON to start the system monitor function The system monitor function and special module monitor function can also be started from the Utility screen Ladder monitor screen see Sec 6 2 PLC read screen see Sec 6 1 1 Touch J End Sea Touch Menu Ladder read screen see Sec 6 1 2 Touch Ladder 6 13 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 2 Ladder monitor The ladder monitor screen display and the keys that are shown at the top of the Screen are explained in this section 6 2 1 Ladder monitor screen display and key functions The ladder monitor screen varies
62. Specified loop Master station STATION FF Host 1 to 64 Local station 0 Station number of management station 1 to 64 Normal station When the setting is finished the system configuration of the specified station is displayed See Sec 12 1 4 for operations which come after these operations 12 3 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 1 4 Specifying monitor module and selecting monitor menu The operation when starting the special module monitor for an optional module is explained using the positioning module AD71 as an example Operation procedure Display System Configuration screen See Sec 12 1 1 v Specify module to be monitored Touch display position of module 1 From the modules assigned to slots 0 through 7 of each base unit specify the special function module where the format is displayed For modules where the format is not fiet shows monitor monii displayed monitor with the system monitor function See Sec 9 5 Specify input output modules according to Sec 13 1 2 Specify the menu corresponding to the type of data to be monitored 3 With modules for which the monitor menu cannot all be displayed in one screen touch the keys at the right of the screen to scroll the display menu Specify menu to be monitored Touch display position of menu Display monitor screen of specified menu
63. contact points Section T C monitor and coils subsequent to specified x x device Monitoring of x points of current values subsequent to specified Section BM monitor buffer memory of specified special x x module ing of bit device Changing of current value for uffer memory of word device of current value for T C Section can be used while monitoring T C Changing of set value for T C can be used while monitoring T C Changing of device values using Section Quick test a test 9 6 2 Device comment Device comment display Display Decimal and hexadecimal display Seco switching of word device values and buffer 9 1 2 memory values Special module Monitoring of buffer memory of Ch 11 monitor function special module on special screen Network monitor Monitoring of network status of 15 function MELSECNET B Il or 10 Sequence program in the ACPU i Ig List editor function list edited Ch Bl 0 uw 4 1 When connected to the PLC CPU without clock function FXoN FX1 FX2NC D additional function cannot be set Also the clock function can be used with the FX2 and FX2N when cassette for the realtime clock is used 2 When connected to the PLC CPU without clock function additional function cannot be set 3 You can set the clock function only when you are using A9GT RS 2T which includes a clock element 4 T C set values and coils cannot be monitored o m
64. lt cos 282 8 8 w 8 8 2 o 100 180 readout from the special function module Disabled Enabled 4321 8765 0110110110110110 Error 1 Enabled 0 Disabled IS complete Conversion 87654321 j j OS executes it automatically 1 Completed O Not Completed Sample Ruerage Count Time 87654321B 7654321 0110110110110110 1 Averaging 1 Time Average 0 Sampling 0 Count Average 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ni CHI disconn Bg CHS disconn W CH disconn B CH6 disconn Temp Sensor Type 0 disconn disconn Witrror Code 012345 0 New JIS DIN 1 010 JIS Mi CH4 disconn CH8 disconn Displays format of module being monitored Displays buffer memory data of object module in its current form or in a graph Display status of I O signal with the PLC CPU When testing tests after moving the cursor to the display position of the target data The keys used for the operation with the monitor screen shown in 2 are displayed Touch input 2 Key functions The chart below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the System monitor screen operation Function Monitoring ends and display returns to the screen where the special module monitor function was begun Ends current monitoring and moves to screen that shows monitor menu Operation can be used only if the special function module has a Monito
65. that is not displayed just before or after the current display V Scrolls down one line A Scrolls up one line 9 11 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 4 TC Monitor monitor of timer and counter The function that monitors only the time T and counter c when monitoring is called the TC monitor The TC monitor operation when executing the system monitor is explained below 9 4 1 Basic operation The TC operation procedure is shown below See Sec 9 1 1 Operation procedure Select TC Monitor with the basic screen ese When a screen other than the basic screen is displayed touch MENU at the top of the currently displayed screen display the basic screen and select TC Monitor When you touch you return to the basic screen NETWK No 0 STATION FF When you touch FORM you can change this display See Sec 9 1 2 When you touch SET the monitor station and device PRESS SET KEY SELECT can be specified See Sec 9 1 3 ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp NO Specify the initial monitor device 1 Specify the station and devised to be monitored For the method of the specifying see Sec 9 1 3 When reading is complete display the TC Monitor screen TC MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF 0 PV 0 SV 1 PV 0 SV 2 PV 150 SV 3 PV OSV 4 PV OSV 5 6 7
66. 01 01 01224567890 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 ax 2 0 01 01 01 01234567890 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 1 3 01 01 01 012394567890 01234567890 1012345678 01234 01234 1 ajo 01 01 01 01234567890 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 5 0 01 101101 01234567890 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 win arc Dwell No or thod A Ni Address adipose Speed Code 1 01 01 01 01 01224567890 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 ax 2 0 01 01 01 01234567830 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 2 3 01 01 01 01234567890 01234567890 1012345678 01234 01234 2 4 01 O1 01 01 01234567890 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 Slot 01 0O1 01 01234567890 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 Pati vain APC Dwell No rn thad FA N Address Address Speed Time Code 1 01 01 01 01 01234567890 01234557830 012345678 01234 01234 ax 2 0 01 1 01 01 01234567890 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 3 3 01 01 01 01 01234567890 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 3 alo 01 101101 01234567890 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 sla 01 01 01 01234567590 01234567890 012345678 01234 01234 Contents of display The positioning data corresponding to the data number and data name shown on the screen for Axis 1 is displayed Pattern This is displayed based on Bits 0 to 1 of the applicable
67. 012 012 0 O12 01234567 01294 012 012 0 O12 01234567 012934 012 012 0 013 01234567 01234 012 012 Q 013 01234567 01234 012 012 014 01234567 01234 012 012 Q 014 01234567 01234 012 012 0 015 01234567 01234 012 012 0 015 01234567 01234 012 012 0 016 01234567 01234 012 012 0 016 01234567 01294 012 012 0 017 01234567 01234 012 012 0 017 01234567 01294 012 012 0 018 01234567 01234 012 012 0 018 01234567 01294 012 012 0 019 01234567 01234 012 012 0 019 01234567 01294 012 012 0 020 01254567 01294 012 012 0 020 01254567 01294 012 012 0 1 2 3 4 5 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The set value of the positioning address for each data number is displayed 5072 to 5111 7072 to 7111 The set value of positioning speed for each data number is displayed 4272 to 4291 6272 to 6291 The set value of the dwell time for each data number is displayed 4672 to 4691 6672 to 6691 The set value of the M code for each data number is displayed 3872 to 3891 5872 to 5891 The 4 bits where the set status of the positioning pattern the positioning method and the positioning direction for each data number is stored are displayed in hexadecimal format When F is displayed b15 L M code housed 1 Positioning pattern 3872 to 3891 5872 to 5891 00 Positioning complete 01 Positioning continues 11 Speed changes and positioning continues 2 Positioning method 0 Absolute 1 Increment
68. 1 Axis 2 axis 3 Address x10 5 inthl giosareqaso 01234567890 01294567890 x10 5 deg i 2 x10 5 mm min x10 3 inch min aris Speed e m MEI 012345678 012345678 012345678 PLS sec fixis Status Error Warning M Code L S 012 012 01234 3 i9 15 ot i1 01234 012 01 01234 Pattern Method ACC Dec i 0 0 0 0 0 0 7 8 9 10 11 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The feed current value is displayed The axis speed is displayed The axis operation status is displayed The axis error No is displayed when an axis error occurs The axis warning No is displayed when an axis warning occurs The M code valid M code that is set in the data during positioning is displayed Positioning data No during positioning is displayed The actual data No is also displayed when specified indirectly The positioning identifier of the positioning data during positioning is displayed Bt 15 to 876543 to 0 9 m 19 8 Operation pattern Acceleration time no Deceleration time no Data control method 12 81 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 3 Basic parameter monitor 1 Basic parameter 1 SET Data MONIT ADTSP Basic Parameter 1 che MENU FP Parameter Valid Range 1Axis 2nxis 3 xis O mm i inch 1 Unit 2 degree 0 1 0 Lead
69. 1 Steps in getting started with the network monitor 15 1 15 2 Steps in starting the network monitor function from the user created monitor screen 15 2 SWITCHING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS 16 1to 16 2 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS 17 1 Own station 17 1 1 Display contents and keys functions 17 2 Detailed own station monitor 17 2 1 Display contents and keys functions MELSECNET B or MELSECNET Il master 17 2 2 Display contents and keys functions MELSECNET B or MELSECNET Il local station eeeennn 17 2 3 Display contents and keys functions MELSECNET 10 Control station ordinary Station 17 2 4 Display contents and keys functions MELSECNET 10 remote master station 17 3 Other station monitor 17 3 1 Display contents and keys functions 17 3 2 Display contents and keys functions 17 3 3 Display contents and keys functions 17 3 4 Display contents and keys functions 17 3 5 Display contents and keys functions 17 3 6 Display contents and keys functions 17 3 7 Display contents and keys functions Gli asi RO He M ie eid 17 1 own station monitor sseeeessseeeeeeeenene 17 1 MAT e ed RA er HR ete E 17 3 acting as a 17 3 acting as 17 4 acting as a MORTE
70. 10 3 dee mml 012345678 012345678 012345678 nec 1 to 1000000 X PLS seCl cbc cece eee 6 Return Retry 0 Retry i retru ch 0 0 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal Axis 3 The zero return method is displayed The zero return direction is displayed Forward address increase direction Reverse address decrease direction The zero address that is set when the zero return is complete is displayed The maximum speed for the zero return is displayed The creep speed after the near signal turns on is displayed speed before zero return is complete This indicates whether or not to retry the zero return with the zero return retry function 12 86 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 2 Detailed parameters for origin return SET Data MONIT AD75P OPR Extended Parameter RESET Chg END Parameter Valid Range 1Axis enxis o Sg uis 1 0 ta 65535 01234 01234 01234 Duell Time eS rr eed os nul OR PEIPER REEL 2 OPR 1 to 300 012 012 012 Iargue Limit ol Leib ME RM TE 0 to 10 1 pm i Travel Distance 2147483647 10 5 inch 3 EM 4107 5 deg 0123456783 0123456783 0123456783 Seles PO es ean le et odes Smee aah 4 Accel Time i T IM E
71. 10 sec and 60 min 00 sec Available for the A985GOT only factory set to 00 min 10 sec e Grip switch You can set whether the grip switch will be used or not When the setting is USE hold down the grip switch and perform operation Setup and self diagnostic operations can be performed independently of the grip switch May be set only for the A950 handy GOT factory set to USE e If itis released You can set whether the touch key pressed on the GOT display will be turned off or not at the time of grip switch cancel At the setting of NO ACTION the pressed touch key is turned off when it is released May be set only for the A950 handy GOT factory set to KEY OFF e f the touch panel is not touched within the specified time the screen saver function switches off the display to prevent burn in of the display device Especially for the display screen type of EL it is recommended to use this function e Dedicated to the A985GOT the Human sensor function automatically deactivates the screen saver without any touch on the touch panel by means of a signal detected by the Human sensor Using the system information function of the GOT the signal detected by the Human sensor may also be controlled by the PLC CPU For full information on the system information function refer to the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE HELP function Signal detection timings are shown below System signal 2 Detection Human
72. 16 6 Enable 7 3 3 CHE Enable 8 8 8 MS Error Reset 3 19 9 A A A B B B B 1C F LF F The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 40 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 15 3 Graph monitor SET Data HUNIT ALS66DAV Graph Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END utput x 100 CH 1 CH 2 CH 3 CH 4 1 CH 5 CH 6 CH 7 CH 8 E Enabled Error Analog Output 021101101 1 Disabled H Error Buffer memory address to reference decimal For A1S68DAI The present input value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital input value of each channel is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from O to For A1868DAV The present input value a value between 2000 to 2000 for the digital input value of each channel is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 2 The analog output enabled disabled status for each channel is displayed a OE E is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs ee 3 When the digital input value set for each channel is greater than less than 10 to 17 the allowable value a is displayed 12 41 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 16 A616AD module monitor 12 16 1 Operation
73. ACPU this operation is not required The operation automatically changes to Selection of Function and Mode in 19 2 2 NOW READING PLC Start the list editor function PLESE WAIT A MOMENT shows communication status with the PLC CPU MOTION CONTOROLLER NOT SUPPORTED y input of the keyword is requested KEYWORD v Input the keyword registered in the connected ACPU and press the GO key Input the keyword to 6 letters maximum with the device No constant setting key 0 to 9 A to F 0 4 0 4 1 1 GO When the keyword KEYWORD 040411 is input Y The GOT checks the input keyword and displays the result If an incorrect keyword is input When the input keyword The check result display time is about 2 seconds SEXNORDSCEOR To Mode Selection 19 2 2 When the input keyword KEYWORD NG is not correct 1 1 When the input keyword does not match with the registered keyword only the following operations in Chapter 20 can be allowed Other modes Error step reading Buffer memory overall monitor Time monitor PLC No setting Main sub switching POINTS e For operations not shown in other modes clear delete the registered keyword with the PLC memory all clear in the following page if you do not remember the keyword registered in the ACPU When PLC memory all clear is performed the
74. Batch Monitor with the basic screen When a screen other than the basic screen is displayed touch MENU at the top of the currently displayed screen display the basic screen and select Batch monitor T When you touch MENU you return to the basic screen When you touch FORM you can change this display See Sec 9 1 2 When you touch SET the monitor station and device can be specified See Sec 9 1 3 NETWKNo 0 STATION FF PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp NO Specify the first monitor device 1 Specify the station and device to be monitored For the method of specifying see Sec 9 1 3 When reading is complete display the Batch Monitor screen BATCH MONITOR TEST FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 10 32767 D 18 500 D 11 0 D 19 3234 D 12 0 D 20 0 D 13 1 D 21 0 D 14 0 D 22 0 D 15 3 D 23 32768 D 16 0 D 24 0 D 17 0 D 25 0 Y H Change the screen display ee Do if needed For the display change method see Sec 9 1 2 9 10 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 3 2 Batch monitor screen display and key functions In this section the Batch Monitor screen display and the functions of keys displayed at the top of the screen are explained 1 Display 5
75. Change the screen with the following keys ET M a KENSA Comment 1903 1959 06 19 13 02 D Line Exit Move to the screen when the ladder monitor is started Eom Ladder Move to the ladder monitor screen Menu Start from setting window 2 for the network No station No Once PLC reading is performed operations for PLC reading are not required from the next time onward 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 1 2 Ladder read operation This section describes the object sequence program of the ladder monitor that is read from the PLC CPU for the operation displayed on the ladder monitor screen Operation procedure When there is a at the upper left of the screen touch it to return Ext PLCRD Mon Menu 1 gt 1 to the original screen MENU Touch When the screen below is currently displayed it is not necessary to touch this Dev Sea Step Sea 16 32Bit ContSea End Sea 10 160 Exit PLCRD Mon Menu Print Coil Sea FactSea Test Cmnt Screen When specifying and reading the device contact point or coil used in the program 4 i Touch any of these Dev Sea Cont Sea CoilSea When entering device name When entering dev
76. Contents of display The current values of channels 1 and 2 are displayed The set values of channels 1 and 2 are displayed The specified status of the mode register of channels 1 and 2 is displayed The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 10 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 4 A1SD61 module monitor 12 4 1 Operation monitor The Channel 1 and 2 Monitor Screen is used as an example SET Data MONIT ALSD61 Operation Monitor Screen CH1 2 RESET Che END Present Count Enable Limit Switch Output Value 1234567830 7 Decremental Count Counter Function Start Counter Function Preset Command Count Value Ring Counter ounter Setting 0 01234567890 8 Samp lingPer iodic 5 Preset 1 0 No setting Value 0123456 7899 9 External Preset 1 Latch counter Ring Counter Reset Ext Preset 2 Sampling counter Value O 1234587830 L 10 3 Periodic pulse counter Error Reset 4 Counter disable Pulse I P Mode 012345 11 6 Channel Na 2 1 M Error LS D P 87654321 0 fi Phase I F and la Error Code 012 Status decremental count No of No of 1 A Phase and B Phase Dogs ON 1 FF Dogs ON 2 OFF IVP 3 0 0 2 e Phase I P X 1 D 0 0123456789001234567890 D 0 0123456783001234567
77. Data Error 01 I 6 Channel 3 01254 3 01234 6 4 Channel 4 01254 01234 6 Channel 5 01294 01234 6 Channel 6 01294 01234 6 Channel 7 01294 01234 6 Channel 8 01294 01234 86 Buffer memory address each channel is displayed displayed 3 The values set for the time and number of times for averaging processing of 2109 each channel is displayed 4 The current output value a value between 0 to 2000 for the digital output 1010 17 value of each channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 The number of channels that are used is displayed With A68AD S2 monitoring the display value is invalid The error code is displayed when a writing data error occurs 12 27 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 11 2 I O monitor SET Data MONIT amp 688D Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che menu ENO Inputs 6X Outputs Error 10 0 10 1 M 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 3 13 3 13 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 B B B B D D D D E E E E F F F F Contents of display The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 28 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 11 3 Graph monitor SET Data MONIT amp 688D Graph Monitor Screen
78. Each List This section describes the operation procedures of the list edit screen 20 1 Basic operation of key input After starting the list editor function basic operations of key input are described 20 1 1 Switching of valid key function indicated at the upper lower part of the key When the list edit has started whether the upper or the lower key available for two purposes is valid is displayed on the second line at the left end of the display The GOT controls and displays the valid key A user may switch the valid key with the following keys SHIFT Upper character key is valid SET Lower character key is valid The following keys can be input if the valid key is at the lower character Input of SHIFT key is not required Comparison symbol key at the command input of comparison operation instruction lt gt e Minus key at the source data of command The valid key after setting each mode switches as follows Read mode Write mode Insert mode Upper character When the cursor position is at the setting value and the device step is in the Write mode the lower character key is valid Parameter mode and other modes Always lower character key Help of each mode Always lower character key EI When Command Read is selected from the Help in the Read mode the upper character key is valid When SHIFT key is input and the valid key is switched the switched
79. Key Functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the other station CPU RUN status monitor screen Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station CPU RUN status monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 16 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 7 Display contents and keys functions other station loop status monitor This section describes the other station loop status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys This option is not selectable when connecting to a MELSECNET B or MELSECNET II local station or establishing MELSECNET 10 coaxial bus connections 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT Display example Reversing part is inr Reversing partis an abnormal station 3 M an abnormal station The F loop primary loop status and the R loop secondary loop status are displayed Station numbers are shown up to the maximum number of linked stations Any station that stays in
80. PLC CPU to be monitored All of the keys used with the operation are touch keys displayed on the screen Touch the position where the object key is displayed and enter the data 1 When the MELSEC A FX ladder monitor is executed Operation procedure When the ladder monitor function starts up execution begins from the specified operation with the network No and Station of the object PLC CPU noted below Touch When the screen below is currently displayed it is not necessary to touch this 1 Specify the network No and station No for the object PLC CPU 1 For data link system CC Link system BoP NETNO 0 Saale READ ST Own station ae reo Pew Eee 0 Master station Pint 1 to 64 Local stations For network system NET NO 0 Host loop To the following page 0 Master station READ ST FF Own station 1 to 64 Control station 1 to 64 Normal station 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT From the previous page la v Select input area Alphanumeric Input network No and station No 2 Touch Input confirmation READ STATE READ SELECTION PARAM READ PROGRAM COMMENT PROG CMNT MAIN PROGRAM 1 SETTING EX CMNT SUB PROGRAM 2 A4U NON SETTING NETWORK NO 0 SUB
81. PROGRAM 3 A4U PLC NO FF lt SWITCH SET Es ese s De OOS 2 In Read Selection specify the sequence program to be read from the object station Specify whether or not to perform comment read Setting item switch Read program comment Select program Read program Select comment read enabled disabled Comment 3 Input the keyword that is registered to that station If no keyword has been registered nothing has to be entered 4 The contents and capacity of the read procedure are displayed When you touch Break the read procedure is interrupted When reading resumes it stars at the beginning 5 Completed is displayed To the following page 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT READ STATE READ SELECTION PARAM READ PROGRAM COMMENT CMNT MAIN PROGRAM 1 SETTING EX CMNT SUB PROGRAM 2 40 NON SETTING NETWORK 5d SUB PROGRAM 40 PLC NO FF gt SWITCH TL SEL 2 SET Exit Ladder Break Menu tJ CJ EG Change screen 1 Data being entered can be cleared by the following keys Exit Moves to screen where AC Clears all data being entered to the object area ladder monitor function DEL Clears one character at the curs
82. THE UTILITY 4 1to4 18 4 1 Utility functioritable iiec iere Rete e te ee tee iei d ke HR te ere 4 1 4 2 Selecting the utility function 4 2 4 3 Selecting the required function on the utility menu screen Adjusting the brightness contrast of the monitor 4 3 4 4 Copying the monitor data OS data between the internal memory and memory card Screen amp OS copy 4 5 4 5 Setting the operating environment of the GOT Setup 4 7 4 6 Running diagnostic checks GOT hardware self test sse 4 11 47 Displaying GOT memory information memory information sseeeene 4 12 4 8 Setting the Glock Clock irridet secre rime eiecit Roe Lade deb ore Fa eae dete a dose bse 4 13 4 9 Displaying the display area cleanup screen screen 4 14 4 10 Changing security levels security DASSWOL cccceccesseeeceeceeceeceeeeeeeaesaesaeseeesaesaesaeseeeeaesaeseeseaeeaaes 4 15 4 11 Controlling limited access to the utility menu 5 4 16 4 12 Adjusting the brightness of the monitor screen on the dedicated screen Brightness adjustment esssssssssssseseeeeeneeeennnennnen nennen nnne rennen 4 17 OPERATION PROCEDUR
83. Type bus connection unit User s Manual IB 66760 Describes specifications part names and operation of A7GT BUSS 13JL07 with A7GT BUSS Manual name A7GT BUS2S Type multi drop bus connection unit User s Manual Describes specifications part names and operation of A7GT BUS2S with A7GT BUS2S A9GT RS4 Type Serial Communication Board User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of A9GT RS4 with ASGT RS4 A9GT RS2 Type Serial Communication Board User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of ASGT RS2 with ASGT RS2 A9GT RS2T Type Serial Communication Board User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of A9GT RS2T with ASGT RS2T A7GT J71AP23 R23 Type Data Link Unit User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of A7GT J71AP23 R23 with A7GT J71AP23 R23 A7GT J71AT23B Type Data Link Unit User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of A7GT J71AT23B with A7GT J71AT23B A7GT J71LP23 BR13 Type Network Unit User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of A7GT J71LP23 BR13 with A7GT J71LP23 BR13 A8GT J61BT13 Type CC Link Communication Unit User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of ABGT J61BT13 with ABGT J61BT13 A8GT J61BT15 Type CC Link Communication Unit User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of ABGT J61BT15 with ABGT J61BT15
84. and fuel devices manned transport devices equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices in which human life or assets could be greatly affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required fin terms of safety and control system please consult with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications GOT A900 Series Operating Manual SW4D5C GOTR PACKE compatible Extended Option Functions Manual SW4 GOTR O SYS E MODEL MODE 13979 SH NA 080069 B 0005 MEE s MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION HEAD OFFICE MITSUBISHI DENKI BLDG MARUNOUCHI TOKYO 100 8310 TELEX J24532 CABLE MELCO TOKYO NAGOYA WORKS 1 14 YADA MINAMI 5 HIGASHI KU NAGOYA JAPAN When exported from Japan this manual does not require application to the Ministry of International Trade and Industry for service transaction permission Specifications subject to change without notice
85. are displayed on the reference axis side and 0 is displayed on the other axis side The actual positioning speed is displayed 12 95 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 13 Monitoring the target values and machine values SETZ Data MONIT 75 Destination Mechanical Val RESET Che END Axist Axis2 Axis3 8107 1 um 10 5 inch pestina 107 5 deg 01234567830 01294567990 01234567590 Mechanical x10 1 gum Address x10 5 inch i 10 5 deg 01234567690 0129456 7990 0125456 7990 PLS Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The object values when using positioning based on position control are displayed With ABS adress With INC amount of movement When using speed position changing control the amount of movement following a change to position control is displayed The individual position determined by the machine is used as the machine origin point and the current machine feed value position is displayed 12 96 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 14 Monitoring external I O signals and status signals flags SET Data MONIT ADTSP External Input Output Status Info RESET che MENU EN External I D Status Info 1 2 3 1 2 3 DrivelnitReadu Con
86. buffer memory address Control method Acceleration Deceleration Address Arc address Specified speed Dwell time M code Buffer memory address to reference decimal 1300 to 2299 1300 1310 1300 1310 1300 1310 1300 1310 1306 1307 1316 1317 1308 1309 1318 1319 1304 1314 1302 1312 1301 1311 The positioning data corresponding to the data number and data name shown on the screen for Axis 2 is displayed Pattern Address Arc address Dwell time M code The contents of the display are the same as for 1 2300 to 3299 2300 2310 2306 2307 2316 22317 2308 2309 2318 2319 2302 2312 2301 2311 The positioning data corresponding to the data number and data name shown on the screen for Axis 3 is displayed Pattern Address Arc address Dwell time M code The contents of the display are the same as for 1 12 98 3300 to 4299 8300 3310 3306 3307 3316 3317 3308 3309 3318 3319 3302 3312 3301 3311 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 24 AJ71PT32 S3 and A1SJ71PT32 S3 module monitor The contents displayed on the monitor screens of the AJ71PT32 S3 and A1SJ71PT32 S3 modules are the same except for the section where the module model name is displayed In this section we will look at the monitor screens for the AJ7
87. depending on the type of PLC CPU to be monitored 1 When MELSEC A FX ladder monitor is executed a Display STEP 12845718374 When comment is not displayed maximum 8 lines 1 Apts Neto When comment is displayed maximum 3 lines Normalily Character ON Action display X0001 0002 m ON OFF status display for ladder monitor etn jd ON status a OFF status s lt gt 1H To 7 warning 3 ceno F i E 3 The MCR command is normally displayed as Print Cancel Screen Print Sequence program is displayed A maximum of 11 contact points is displayed in one line of a ladder for 12 contact points or more move to the next line When a comment display is specified a comment is also displayed expanded comments are given priority For the method of displaying comments see Sec 6 2 3 A maximum of eight devices is displayed for the word device current value timer and counter current value upper row and set value lower row When the set value is an indirect specification the value of the indirectly specified device is displayed To switch between decimal and hexadecimal for the displayed value see Sec 6 2 3 Display the keys used with the operation on the ladder monitor screen shown in b Touch input The display step number left and the remaining step number right are displayed b Key functions Th
88. displayed 0 Positioning control in progress 1 Velocity control in progress 1 This displays whether the torque command electrical current command for the motor is controlled by the rated torque written in the motor catalog x the 4 The status of the control mode when changing modes from velocity to torque limit value 0 When motor is rotating within set torque limit 1 Limited 12 61 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT to reference decimal sequence program such as a data error or BUSY in progress Hol TN stop due to an external signal when starting or when a startup is in progress The error code output from the servo amp that was converted into an error code for AD7OD is displayed 15 The change value PLS of the current value is displayed 80 81 The change value PLS of the speed position travel distance is displayed 86 87 17 The change value of the velocity change is displayed 82 83 18 The set value of the JOG velocity is displayed 84 85 The change value of the torque limit is displayed 20 The actual number of revolutions of the motor is displayed 110 The motor current is displayed as 100960f the rated current 111 The data for monitoring the load of the regeneration resistance is displayed 112 The maximum torque is displayed when it is 100 of the rated torque 113 Valid when using peripheral equipment SW GP AD70DP Servo Read Test mode n
89. e W 200 43 R 50 68378428 DW D 300 30000 Up to 8 points for a PLC CPU device registered by the user can be monitored in one window see Section 9 2 T C monitor TC MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWKNo 0 STATION FF T OPV osy Productionline T 1PV 0 SV 0 ib OH Production line B T 2PV 150SV 150 e Production line T 3PV 0 SV 0 it OH Production line D V Up to 8 points including the current value set value contact point and coil can be monitored in a window subsequent to a PLC CPU timer T counter C specified by the user see Section 9 4 Batch monitor BATCH MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 10 32767 18 500 D 11 0 D 19 3234 D 12 0 D 20 0 D 13 1 D 21 0 D 14 0 D 22 0 D 15 3 D 23 32768 D 16 0 D 24 0 D 17 0 D 25 0 Up to 16 points subsequent to a PLC CPU device specified by the user can be monitored in one window see Section 9 3 Buffer memory monitor BM MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF VO 1 BM 1110 32767 BM 1118 0 BM 1111 64 BM 1119 0 BM 1112 149 1120 150 BM 1113 1111 BM 1121 131 BM 1114 126 BM 1122 32768 BM 1115 160 BM 1123 555 BM 1116 255 BM 1124 2368 BM _1117 1200 BM 1125 11000 Up to 16 points subsequent to the buffer memory of a special function module specified by the user can be monitor
90. entering a password e Touch Exit to return to the previous monitor screen 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 12 Adjusting the brightness of the monitor screen on the dedicated screen Brightness adjustment 1 Display screen Screen Example 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 2 Function Used to adjust the brightness of the monitor screen 8 Operation a Basic operation Touch any of to Mito select the brightness e Touch xt 3 and at top of the screen to make contrast adjustment You can adjust the contrast in about 20 steps e Touch Enter to store the settings into the b Return to the utility menu screen e Touching returns to the utility menu screen 5 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT Chapter5 Operation procedures for the ladder monitor function The operation procedures to follow when using the ladder monitor function are explained in the following section 5 1 Operation procedures before starting ladder monitoring This section contains a summary of the procedures for transmitting the system program OS for the ladder monitor function from the personal computer to the GOT until it is installed in the built in memory Bm For details please refer to the Help in Drawing Software Details of the screen display and key operation are shown in the Help Start Connec
91. is detected in the thermocouple or the compensating lead wire When the A60MXT is used the set status of the broken wire detection for the thermocouple that is connected to each channel is displayed 20 to 27 0 Broken wire detection disabled 1 Broken wire detection enabled 180 to 1FF 40 to 47 When the A60MXT is used the temperature detection value of each channel is displayed 200 to 27F The set temperature value when the digital value is O or 4000 of the channel to which the AGOMXT being monitored is connected is displayed 30 to 11 E is displayed when an error occurs 12 51 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 18 3 I O monitor SETZ Data MONIT amp 616TD Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che menu ENP Inputs X Dutputs tY 1 We HOT Error 10 0 M LED Display READY 1 1 1 Error g zZ amp Discon Error 3 3 3 Digital Error 4 4 4 Temp Errar 5 5 5 a 3 3 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 A 1 A 1A B B B B 10 10 Contents of display The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 52 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 18 4 Setting monitor when A60MXT is used
92. is displayed in CH1 when a broken wire is detected in any channel 12 36 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 14 2 I O monitor SET Data MONIT A6SRD Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Chg menu ENO Inputs X Outputs Y DT Error 10 EADY 1 rite Data Error fie Hi Disconnected 13 He Disconnected 14 H3 Disconnected 15 H4 Disconnected 16 H5 Disconnected 17 Disconnected 18 Disconnected 19 Disconnected LA 1 Error Reset MMII CB b Ul The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 37 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 14 3 Graph monitor Data MONIT A68RD Graph Monitor Screen RESET Che END Disabled Enabled 87554321 500 0110110110110110 2 i i 400 1 Enabled 0 Disabled agg Conversion 87654321 0110110110110110 3 a tt 1 Completed 0 Not Completed u gt r en Samp le Average Count Time E 0 6765432167654321 0110110110110110 o 4 5 1 Averaging 1 Time Average 180 0 Sampling 0 Count Average 1 B disconn 5 disconn Bg cHe disconn gg CHE disconn HDT Errar Temp Sensor Type 0 Bg disconn gg CH d
93. key operation are shown in the Help Connect GOT to Personal computer Start up GOT Itis not necessary to set up and operate the GOT after startup Start up Personal computer and drawing software With the drawing software transmit the system program OS for the system monitor function from the Personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory Transmit the data using the installation dialog box When installation is finished the system monitor can be operated through the GOT When installation is finished Completed is displayed on the installation dialog box Drawing software operation is finished Proceed to Section 8 2 to operate the screen monitor End 8 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 8 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of system monitoring This section explains the operation procedure for the GOT when starting each operation of the system monitor function after the system program OS of the system monitor function has been installed in the GOT built in memory Start y Start up the GOT Display the user created monitor screen Start the system monitor function 1 v Display the system monitor initial scren The A985 97 960GOT displays 4 divided windows Operation for each window is described The A95 GOT displays 1 window DEVIMON
94. ladder monitor screen Key Function Return to screen where ladder monitor function starts Move to PLC read screen to read sequence program being monitored from PLC CPU PLC read Move to ladder monitor menu screen to specify sequence program to be displayed on ladder monitor screen Ladder read Start monitoring of sequence program that is displayed on ladder monitor Screen Switch display device when there are nine or more devices displaying current values and set values Display one ladder scroll up or down When reading ladder with device specification read next program with same device specification see 2 in Sec 6 1 2 Scrolls the display up or down by ten ladders After executing PLC read if the PLC CPU comment or comment capacity is changed the comment may not be correctly displayed on the ladder monitor screen When changing the comment or comment capacity re start the GOT 6 15 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 2 2 Precaution during ladder monitoring 1 When making connection to the FXCPU a The comment display is kana comments only b During PLC read operation the PLC read can only be performed for own station only c STL step ladder the FXCPU exclusive instruction is not a contact point but treated as an instruction and displayed in the following manner When monitoring with the per
95. loop lines of the own station Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo FLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station 5 LoopBK Info that executes the loopback along the primary loop RLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the secondary loop of Loop Switching Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched is displayed when coaxial bus connections are established 4 Constant LS 17 6 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Section Contents of Display Parameter Setting Common Param Common Spec if Default Param Default Specif Reserved Sta Indicates the availability of a reserved station Have None TsSt Sta e Communication Mode Indicates either of Normal mode or Constant LS e Transmission Mode Indicates either of Normal Trans or Multipl Trans Transmission Stat Indicates either of Normal Trans or Multipl Trans ox 16 displayed when coaxial bus connections are established 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed own station monitor screen Key Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the detailed own station monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed Changes the details on the window only for A95
96. monitor function are shown below 1 Monitoring based on ladder symbols see Section 6 2 for details Sample display Ladder monitor screen STEP 12345 18374 PO M999 K 187 H Sf ov 1 H K K H 1234 D100 _ Mov 2 02 F RST V H MOV 90 0162 H K F MOV 110 D167 H K F MOV 100 D172 L G K K H DUTY 350 400 M9020 D1 D2 v D162 D167 D172 1 2 47 90 110 100 DATA OVERFLOWS ONE SCREEN Exit PLCRD Mon List Print Cancel Screen Print REMARK The Print Screen and Cancel Print buttons are not displayed on the EL type screen 1 Ladder monitor screen A maximum of 8 lines max 11 contact points per line with 12 contact points or more the line returns of a sequence program are displayed on one Screen Also for the current values and other settings of word devices a maximum of 8 devices are displayed With 9 devices or more use the arrow keys to switch displays 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 2 The display format can be changed to show comments for devices see Section 6 2 2 for details Sample display Ladder monitor screen STEP 12345 18374 M9036 PLS M910 H Normally ON Character string Action display X0001 X0002 4H 4 2 pH Ready Start Operation ready display operation instruction K25
97. or modifies a program Change device Changes a device used at the selected step in the program Display Instruction select help instruction Read step Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number NOP continuous Declares the specified part of the program NOP Comment display Displays a comment for the specified device Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Read program Reads a ener ee nel after allowing the user to specify an instruction used Reads a program after allowing the user to Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a device used a device used Automatically scrolls the display of a program that has been read up to Automatic scrolling a specified stb o Corresponds to program read and automatic scroll functions described Help P EM above Automatic PAESE Comment Comment display Displays a comment for the specified device Displays a list of instructions that start with the specified character and allows the user to choose from them Insert program Inserts a new program into the displayed program Display sel Instruction ect help instruction Read step Reads a program after allowing the user to specify a step number Insert Help Moves the selected part of the program to a specified part of the program Co Copies the selected part of the program to a specified part of the Py program Comment display Displays a comment for the specifie
98. or nonconductive Pont While the MELSEC QnA ladder monitor is performed the factor search function cannot be used The touch key of Fact Sea is not displayed Operation procedure M120 Mi30 1 Search for and display a ladder block where a failure STEP 67 932 M131 ty A E MM rooro occurred m Example When a valve connected to Coil Y0030 does P not operate properly begin searching for Coil Y0030 and view its ladder block on the screen Exit PLCRD Ib Es E 2 E EL 3 Print Cancel Screen Print 2 Touch Mon to start the ladder monitoring 3 Touch Menu and then select Fact Sea from among Mon options that appear on screen If you touch Fact Sea without executing the ladder Menu monitor function a message appears on screen telling that No MONITORING 16 32Bit onenean 4 Another dialog box where you can specify a device name PLCRD Mon Menu m seres Tex omnt or device number is displayed on screen Specify any Screen Rep contact of which coil is not turned ON as a search device Example Specify M120 as the search device
99. starting the system monitor if the PLC CPU comment or comment capacity is changed the comment may not be correctly displayed on each monitor screen When changing the comment or comment capacity re start the GOT 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 1 3 Specifying the monitor station and device SET An explanation of the procedure for specifying the monitor station and the device for executing the system monitor is explained below using the Entry Monitor window as example The operation procedure is the same for specifying the monitor station and device when selecting windows other than Entry Monitor Operation procedure Select monitor function with basic screen Or display monitor screen menu screen DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF 32767 e 100 43 68378428 300 25 4 2147483648 DW 200 O4 DW 3004 9 SET Touch DEVICE MONITOR MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF ENTRY DELETE ALL CLR TEST CANCEL ENTRY Touch 1 When there is a Keywindow touching it to returns to the monitor screen See Sec 9 1 1 See the explanatory section for each monitor screen and the menu screen When you touch MENU you return to the basic screen When you touch FORM you change this display See Sec 9 1 2 When you
100. that correspond to the set values are indicated below T ES EE EN NiAl ae CuNi ee PtRh6 NiCr PtRh oP The error correction value of each channel is displayed only in the column of 80 to FF Es CNT No to which the AGOMXT is connected 3 The error code is displayed when an error occurs 4 The connect number and channel are displayed when an error occurs in the 3 thermocouple type setting 12 53 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 18 5 Temperature monitor connect No 0 to connect No 7 when A60MXT is used 1 SET Data MONIT amp 615TD Temperature Monitor Screen CONNECT No 0 RESET Che menu END a 3 A B C D E F Channel No 2 150 100 c s i iii 0 1 2 8 4 5 6 1 ID i D 3 i ct Uu 3 Do CONNECT Na CH Na FEDCBA98 76549210 B Error Data Farmat 0110110110110110 Conversion 0110110110110110 B Error Enable t 4 0 Disabled 1 Enabled B Temp value Err 3 Buffer memory address to f reference hexadecimal The connect number of the monitor being used is displayed The temperature detection value for each channel is graphically displayed 200 to 27F The set status of the data format for each channel is displayed 3 The specified conversion enabled disabled status for each channel is displayed A I is displayed
101. the 106 107 feedback pulse number PLS is displayed i The set value of positioning address P1 PLS is displayed 9 The set status of the positioning pattern is displayed 0 Positioning 1 2 speed trapezoid positioning The status of the control mode when changing modes from velocity to 10 position control is displayed 111 0 Positioning control in progress 1 Velocity control in progress 12 57 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT to reference decimal sequence program such as a startup data error or BUSY in progress stop due to an external signal when starting or when a startup is in progress The change value PLS of the current value is displayed The change value PLS of the speed position travel distance is displayed The change value of the velocity change is displayed 82 83 The set value of the JOG velocity is displayed 84 85 The set value PLS of the upper stroke limit is displayed The set value PLS of the lower stroke limit is displayed The command pulse ratio numerator CMX and denominator CDV are 45 displayed 21 The set value of the acceleration time is displayed 23 The set value PLS of the in position range is displayed The set status of the positioning mode is displayed 0 Positioning 1 Velocity positioning 12 58 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 19 2 Zero return monitor
102. the Personal computer i The GOT does not require further setup procedures or operations after the startup Start up the GOT v Start up the Personal computer and start the drawing software With the drawing software transmit the OS for Transmit the data in the installation dialog box the network monitor function from the Personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory e After the installation is complete a message indicating End appears in the installation dialog box After the installation is finished the network monitor is ready to start through the GOT Finish operating the drawing software serae Proceed to Section 15 2 to operate the network monitor 15 1 15 OPERATING THE NETWORK MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 15 2 Steps in starting the network monitor function from the user created monitor screen The following flowchart outlines how to start the network monitor function after the operating system OS for the network monitor has been installed in the GOT built in internal memory Start x Install a memory board on the GOT Start up the y Go to the user created monitor screen Select the detailed own station monitor or other station monitor option Go to the detailed own station monitor or other See Sections 17 2 and 17 3 station monitor menu 1 Touch the key assigned to the network mon
103. the structure of the monitor screen and the common operations used when executing the detailed own station monitor 17 2 1 Display contents and keys functions acting as MELSECNET B or MELSECNET 11 master station This section describes the detailed own station monitor screen and the function of on Screen keys all of which are displayed and used when the own station acts as the master station on the MELSECNET B or MELSECNET Il 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used The display details are the same foetal info Test uns as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT E TEENS ma Touch button to change the This Station s _ Master pu E ka i displa RLoop Back Station FS play of Loop Switching 15 Display example detail Info Tsst unit 2 Section Contents of Display This Station s TsSt s Info Indicates the station number of the own station e This Station s Indicates the category of the own station Total of L Sta D Link Info Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked The maximum number is defined by common parameters e FLoop Shows the status of the primary loop lines of the own station Normal NG e Shows the status of the secondary loop lines of the own station Normal NG Floop Back Station LoopBK Info Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the primary
104. this section the BM Monitor screen display and the functions of keys displayed at the top of the screen are explained 1 Display BM MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF NOT ow 1 BM BM BM BM BM BM BM BM 1110 1111 1112 1113 1114 1115 1116 1117 32767 BM 1118 0 64 BM 1119 0 Displays current value of a 149 BM 1120 150 4111 BM 1121 131 maximum of 16 devices 126 BM 1122 32768 160 BM 1123 555 255 BM 1124 2368 1200 BM 1125 11000 Displays the keys that are used with the operation of the BM Monitor screen shown in 2 Touch input Displays the monitor station network No and station No and the first 2 digits of the I O signal No of the object module Displays the current values of the buffer memory The screen above shows when the monitor module is 16 bits 2 Key functions The chart below shows the function of the keys that are used with the operation of the BM Monitor screen Function This moves to basic screen function change menu screen for changing to another monitor function or ending the system monitor See Sec 9 1 1 This moves to display change menu screen for changing the number display on the BM monitor screen decimal hexadecimal See Sec 9 1 2 This moves to device setting menu screen to change the monitor device or execute a test Change of monitor device See Sec 9 1 3 Test
105. touch SET you can specify the monitor station and device 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS K NETWK No 0 STATION FF DEVICE 16b 0 32b 1 0 Arrow Select input area 14 P Lett right Character Input network no station device name device no 0 1 Enter monitor module Touch input confirmation Entry monitor for specified device MELSEC GOT 1 Specify network No and station No of object PLC CPU 1 For data link system NET WK No 0 STATION FF Host station 0 Master station 1 to 64 Local station For network system NET WK No 0 Host loop 1 to 255 Specified loop STATION FF Host station 0 Control station 1 to 64 Normal station 2 Specify the device to be monitored 3 When specifying the word device or buffer memory as a monitor device specify the monitor module 0 16 bit 1 word module 1 32 bit 2 word module Match the data to be entered the touch key display at the bottom of the screen will change EX When entering network no When entering device no NETWKNo 0 STATIONIFF DEVICE 50 1 60 0 32b 1 0 EE TE as STATION FF DEVICE 16 0 32b 1 0 1 For the station with either system specify FF which shows the PLC CPU to be accessed or 0 to 64 2 Data being entered can be cleared by the fo
106. type screen display no printout can be produced 1 Printout method during ladder monitoring The printout method during ladder monitoring is described below Ladder monitor screen STEP 12345 18374 Display the ladder monitor screen by touching LADDER MON 1 Execute the printout by touching Print Screen 2 To cancel the printout touch Cancel Print mon o 4 9 lt 6 E Screen Print 6 19 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT MEMO 7 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH LADDER MONITORING Chapter7 Error display and handling with ladder monitoring MELSEC GOT The following chart shows the error messages that are displayed during the ladder monitor operation and the method of handling them Error Message ENTRY CODE MISMATCH Description The specified keyword is different from the keyword that is registered in the object PLC CPU Method of Handling Check the keyword that is registered in the object PLC CPU and specify again FILE NOT FOUND 1 An attempt was made to Switch to the ladder monitor screen when a sequence program had not been read 2 When the file is selected and the Read key is pressed the selected file does not exist in the PLC drive Read the sequence program that is written in the object PLC CPU Ex A sub sequence program can only be s
107. write it into the buffer memory 8 Special module monitor data can be allocated as user monitor screen data The special module monitor data installed in the computer can be allocated to serve as user monitor screen data To do this the steps below are required 1 Using the Copy function allocate special module monitor data from another project as user monitor screen data 2 Correct the data to match the system used for the BM initial buffer memory number of the sprite function which has been set 1 13 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 1 3 5 Features of the network monitor function To use the network monitor function you first must install an operating system OS for the network monitor function on your GOT by using drawing software This enables you to monitor the status of the MELSECNET B MELSECNET Il and MELSECNET 10 networks The following describes the features of the network monitor function 1 Network monitor screens are selectable on the own station monitor screen to monitor the own station and other stations on a network The own station monitor screen enables you to monitor the status of all the network lines connected to the own station A touch of the screen will guide you through various monitor screens to monitor the status of the own station and other stations on a network i 7777 MELSECNET 10 32StaMstSta No 255 2 IntPLC Net OSta MstSta 7 RA weLs
108. zero point signal goes on is displayed 19 The set value PLS of the zero address is displayed 20 The set value of the zero return velocity is displayed 21 The set value of the creep velocity is displayed 12 59 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 19 3 I O Monitor SETZ Data MONIT 070 Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che menu ENP Inputs X Outputs Y Error 10 0 zero Rtn Star ADO READY 1 1 Posit Start 1 zero Rtn Requestl2 2 Forward Start zero Rtn Comple t3 3 Reverse Start BUSY 4 4 Fudd Jog Star Posit Complete 15 5 Rev Jog Star In position 16 6 Vel Pos Restart Excessive Error 17 7 Stop Error Detection 18 8 Error Reset Overt Lou 19 3 Overflow Rese Underf low A A Underflow Reset Serva Ready B B Near Zero Point 1 V P Switchover Stop External 1 D PLC READY Upper Limit LS E Lower Limit LS LF F The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 60 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 20 A70D module monitor 12 20 1 Positioning monitor SET Data MONIT 0700 Positioning ie Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END Posit Start Feed Position 01234557880 Presen ue 01254567890 Forward Start Reverse Start hctual Position 01234567890 Travel Dist
109. 0 0 0 0 C5 HoH 70 C Yow a D D c C3 CO 0 Ca 0 Dutputs x 1 16 T Request No 12 Read Complete TX Request No 13 Read Complete a TIX Reguest No 14 Read Complete RxData Clear Req RTI Error Clear dz Link Comms Start 11 FROM TO Response Faulty Sta Clear Switch BM Chann MN Error Reset The ON OFF status for the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU of the master module is displayed An I O signal is ON when it is displayed in a reverse display 12 103 MELSEC GOT 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 25 71101 ID2 R4 and A1SJ711D1 ID2 R4 module monitor 12 25 1 Action monitor CH 1 and CH 2 i SETZ Data MONIT AJ 11D Movement Monitor Screen CH1 RESET END Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data Addr Data K 100 0123 116 0123 K 132 0123 K 148 125 K 101 01293 117 0129 K 133 123 K 143 01293 K 102 0123 K 118 0129 K 134 123 K 150 0123 K 103 0123 118 0123 K 135 0123 151 0123 104 0123 K 120 0123 K 136 0123 152 0123 105 0129 K 121 0129 137 0129 153 0129 1 106 0123 K 122 l23 K 138 0123 154 0123 K 107 0123 123 0123 K 138 0123 K 155 0123 K 108 0123 K 124 0123 K 140 0123 15
110. 0 Startup with jogging operation 8161 Startup with manual pulser operation Items with the Re prefix are displayed based on the data of Bit 15 of the object buffer memory 12 90 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 8 Monitoring Speed Position Control SET Data MONIT END ADYSP Speed Position Control RESET chg MENU Axisd fixis fixis3 410 1 Travel After x10 5 inch i 1 410 5 deg 01234567890 01234567890 01254567990 QS LM F Correction 10 25 deg 01234567830 01234567880 01234567890 ROP ISTE ee st Sia ina ie ues oa 3 HWP Switch Latch e O us e Switch O Disable i 4 Enabled 1 Enable 9 9 5 Y Control i e Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal 1 The address amount of movement for position control in 814 914 1014 speed position changing control is displayed 815 915 1015 The changed value is displayed when the position Gente 1164 1214 1264 2 amount of movement in the speed control function is i 1165 1215 1265 changed in speed position changing control The ON OFF status of the speed position changing latch flag the flag indicating the control status is displayed The status of Bit 1 of the pertinent buffer memory is displayed 3 Position control in progre
111. 0 to 4000 for the digital output 7 value for each channel where direct access occurs is displayed as a 2 percentage ranging from 0 to 100 12 42 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 16 2 Operation monitor connect No 0 to connect No 7 when multiplex module is used 1 1 Data MONIT AB16AD Operation Monitor Screen CONNECT No 0 FEDCBASB8 76543210 Error Code 01 5 2 Enable 0110110110110110 0 Disabled 1 Enahled Error FEDCBAIS 76543210 I 6 CNT No 0110110110110110 3 Data Format Setting 0110110110110110 Sampling time 01234 ms I 7 Input Status For Data Format 0 Refer to left hand side values 8 Farmat 1 Refer to right hand side values CH 01234 6 01234 6 CH 8 01234 6 01234 6 CH 1 01234 6 01234 6 CH 9 01234 6 01234 6 CH 2 01234 6 01234 6 01234 6 01294 65 3 01234 65 4 01234 65 01234 6 01294 65 CH 4 01234 6 01234 6 CH C 01234 6 01294 6 5 01234 6 01294 6 CH D 01234 6 01294 6 6 01234 6 01234 6 E 01234 6 012394 6 CH 01234 6 01234 6 CH 01234 6 O1294 6 Direct Access INPUT CH 0 MX I P 01234 6 01234 6 8 9 Buffer memory address to No f coments aei play reference hexadecimal The connect number of the monitor being used is displayed eme 2 The specified conversion enabled disabled status of each channel is 101017 disp
112. 0110110110 O Normal Disabled 1 Break Enabled pata Format 0110110110110110 Input Status X Temp Value Input Status X Temp Value Format Format Format 0 Format C 0 6 0 iB CH 8 B 1 6 0 B 3 6 5 5 CH B B 3 5 610 25 CH B 5 a 4 6 0 B CH C 6 5 B B 0 B CH D B sn 6 5 610 5 CHE 5 B5 5 7 6 610 5 5 Digital Dutput Temp Value 0 0 0129 5 0 4000 0123 5 C Buffer memory address to ne Contenisol display reference hexadecimal 1 The connect number of the monitor being used is displayed The specified conversion enabled disabled status for each channel is 10 to 17 displayed The set status of the data format for each channel is displayed 0 Data format 48 4047 1 Data format 2048 4047 The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output value of each channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 When the A60MXT is used 1 is displayed when a temperature was input that exceeds the temperature range set according to the digital output value 50 to 57 Set for each channel When the A60MXT is used 1 is displayed when a temperature was input that exceeds the measurement temperature range set for the measurement 60 to 67 range of each channel When the A60MXT is used 1 is displayed when broken wire
113. 01101101101101101101101 0110110110110110110110110110110 48 45 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110110110 110110110110110 52 49 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110110110110110110110110 56 53 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110110110110110110110110 60 57 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 64 61 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 Cont nts of display Buffer memory to reference decimal The output status for the batch refresh type remote I O module is displayed 0 OFF 1 ON The input status for the batch refresh type remote I O module is displayed 0 OFF 1 ON 10 to 41 110 to 141 12 101 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 24 4 Monitoring separate refreshing As a screen example we will store the monitor screens from the split refresh monitors numbers 1 to 8 in the memory SET Data H BIT1PT32 83 Partial Refresh Data Monitor Scr 1 8 RESET Che Station Transmission Data Receive Data Sines on oe ee a pe Ie ee ais cle so tric poe See oe Number 7654321065432 0765432 0116543210 765432 1011654321076543210 76543210 Station 0 Invalid Data Either Transmission or Rece
114. 01234567890 rud Jog Start 4 Rev Jog start Error Counter 01234567830 Veloci 012345 FLS s E Yel Pos Restart 5 Hee osit Complete Pos Address P1 01234567890 Hog Ve ity 012945 6 1 Zero Rtn RequestPos Address P2 01294567890 Torque Limit 012345 Mi zero Rtn Start 7 zero Rtn Comple Pos Velocitu V1 012345 PLS s Motor Speed 012345 8 stop Pos Velocity v2 012345 PLS s Motor Current 012945 4 ag 9 In position os Pattern 0 Regen Level 012345 ENIM Servo OFF P Mode QO 0 Pos 1 Vel Max Torque 012345 Switchover rque Control Mode Test Mode 0110110110110110 WOT Error 81654321 Error Detection Er pode 1 012 2 0123 3 0123 B Switch 0110110110110110 10 11 12 13 14 Buffer memory address No f SONOS ORDEN to reference decimal The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display p The calculated command pulse number PLS based on the command value is displayed The actual amount of servo movement feedback pulse number PLS calculated from the feedback pulse is displayed a The difference between the command pulse number x CMS CDV and the feedback pulse number PLS is displayed 4 The set value of positioning address P1 PLS is displayed 9 The set status of the positioning pattern is displayed 0 Positioning 1 2 speed trapezoid positioning 10 position control is
115. 04 has occurred due to a malfunction of the AGOMXT unit or a setting error F 0 is displayed for the sampling period current value For a channel not connected to the AGOMX 1 the current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output of that channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 70 to 7F When a channel is connected to the AGOMXT 1 the above is displayed for the digital output value for CHO of AGOMX1 When the A60MXT is used IB is displayed when a temperature was input that exceeds the temperature range set according to the digital output value Set for each channel When the A60MXT is used IB is displayed when a temperature was input that exceeds the measurement temperature range set for the measurement range of each channel When the A60MXT is used IB is displayed when broken wire is detected in the thermocouple or the compensating lead wire 12 50 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 18 2 Operation monitor connect No 0 to connect No 7 when multiplex module is used SET Data MONIT 8616TD Operation Monitor Screen CONNECT 0 RESET Che menu ENO 2 Channel FEDCBA9876549210 FEDCBAI8 76545210 anversion 0110110110110110 Digital value Err 0110110110110110 nable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Temp Value Err 0110110110110110 qoo o0 b d Err 0110110110110110 isc Errar Enable 011011
116. 08 feedback pulse is displayed The difference between the command pulse number x CMS CDV and the feedback pulse 4 Ses 106 107 number PLS is displayed The set value of positioning address P1 PLS is displayed 61 62 The set value of positioning address P2 PLS is displayed 65 66 The set value of positioning velocity V1 is displayed 63 64 The set value of positioning velocity V2 is displayed The set status of the positioning pattern is displayed 0 Positioning 1 2 speed trapezoid positioning The status of the control mode when changing modes from velocity to position control is displayed 0 Positioning control in progress 1 Velocity control in progress 11 The error code is displayed when an error occurs that can be handled by a sequence program such as a data error or BUSY in progress The error code is displayed when an error occurs that causes monitoring to stop due to an A 12 f external signal when starting or when a startup is in progress The change value PLS of the current value is displayed The change value PLS of the speed position travel distance is displayed 15 The change value of the speed change is displayed 16 The set value of JOG speed is displayed After zero return starts the travel distance PLS from when the near zero point signal goes on until zero return is complete is displayed aja AIO zi e 18 The set value PLS of the travel distance after the near
117. 1 18 0800082 13082 5138 CONTENTS ROM ERNIE WY P 1 1101 16 1 1 Before getting started with various functions 1 1 1 2 Preca tioris before use aso poete aet pud idee edd tdg idee uel 1 1 1 3 Features s ecd eo Ht ge ite e RU a 1 6 1 8 1 Features of the utility nennen 1 6 1 3 2 Features of the ladder monitor function 1 8 1 8 3 Features of the system monitor function 1 10 1 8 4 Features of the special module monitor 1 12 1 8 5 Features of the network monitor function 1 14 1 8 6 Features of the List editor function sese 1 16 BEFORE BEGINNING OPERATION essere 2 1102 2 2 1 Required equipment ced e iiia d e eed died 2 1 SPECIFICATIONS Ble cela Nah aatia 3 1to3 18 3 1 Ladder monitor function specifications nennen 3 1 3 1 1 PLC CPUS to be monitored 3 1 3 1 2 Access ranges to be monitored ener rennen nnns 3 1 3 2 System monitor function specifications esssssssssssssssssseeeeenne nennen nennen 3 2 3 2 PEC CPUs to be rmonitored ntt ede ned entend 3 2 3 2 2 Access ranges to 3
118. 100 The current input value a value between 8000 to 8000 for the digital input value of channels 1 and 2 is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from O to 100 The current input value a value between 12000 to 12000 for the digital input value of channels 1 and 2 is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 The current input value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital input value of channels 1 and 2 is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 The current input value a value between 0 to 8000 for the digital input value of channels 1 and 2 is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from O to 100 The current input value a value between 0 to 12000 for the digital input value of channels 1 and 2 is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 When the channel 1 digital input value was set outside the allowable setting range a check code is displayed When the channel 2 digital input value was set outside the allowable setting range a check code is displayed The set resolution selection is displayed 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 12 15 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 7 A62LS module monitor 12 7 1 Operation monitor As a screen example we will store the monitor screens from CH 0 to CH 3 in the memory SET Data MONIT 6215 Operation Monitor Screen No 0 3 RESET Che ME
119. 10110110110110 initial communication 64 490110110110110110 01 Input partial refresh Accumulative Input Error Detection or remote terminal for Partial Refresh Output remote unit FEDCBAS876545210 looa 7 3 8 Buffer memory address to reference decimal The total number of remote stations connected is displayed 0 This shows whether the station number of the connected remote module is for input or output A 1 is displayed for the remote terminal module number where the error has occurred When an error occurs in link communications the communications error code is displayed 0 No error 1 Initial data error 2 Ladder error 3 Erroneous station issued 4 Separate refresh type remote I O module error A communications error has occurred and a 1 is displayed for the station number of the remote module The detection status is maintained until the error is reset A communications error has occurred and a 1 is displayed for the station number of the remote module If the automatic recovery function is on a 0 is displayed when 100 to 103 normal communications have been resumed A 1 is displayed for the station number of a separate refresh type remote I O module where the input information could not be read out within a given time period The detection status is maintained until the error is reset A 1 is displayed for the station number of a separate refresh type remote I O module wh
120. 12 1 12 1 2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions eeeeeenenne 12 2 12 1 3 Setting method for remote station monitoring 12 3 12 1 4 Specifying monitor module and selecting monitor menu sss 12 4 12 1 5 Test for special function moduli 12 5 12 1 6 Changing the screen sssssssssssssssssssee enne nne 12 7 12 2 A61LS module monitor sssssssssssssssseeeeeeee eene nennen tnnt treten nnn nnne 12 8 12 2 1 Operation monitor sse nennen ennt tnn 12 8 12 2 2 VO 2 2 2 12 9 12 3 AD61 module monitor 12 10 12 3 1 Operation monitor sssssssssssssssseseeeeeeet nennen tette trennen tnnt 12 10 12 4 12 5 12 6 12 7 12 8 12 9 12 10 12 11 12 12 12 13 12 14 12 15 12 16 ATSD61 module Irionilor e er e e e ee rect eben rr e eder eee lens 12 11 12 4 1 Operation monitor uo nt nen peer ne PEE DT tp 12 11 12 4 2 VOMON uin nei e eit nh On corde E V eR UE EE AEST REESE ERE A AERE ARS 12 12 62 51 module
121. 1234567 E Direction Ppiszrerseur4pesetdum a COD Ful Lompl 0 P Time 13 01234567 01234567 FF Unit Setting 00 mm 01 inch MCode Errcode 012 01i 012 011 10 deg 11 PLS 2 14 15 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display The set manual pulser run enabled disabled status is displayed The set value of the travel distance per 1 pulse is displayed The set value of the travel distance per 1 pulse using the manual pulser is displayed The set value of the speed limit is displayed The set value of the jog speed limit is displayed The set value of the acceleration deceleration time is displayed The set value of the backlash compensation amount is displayed The set value of the upper stroke limit is displayed The set value of the lower stroke limit is displayed The set value of the error compensation amount is displayed The set value of the starting bias speed is displayed The set value of the positioning complete signal output time is displayed The set value of the M code is displayed The error code is displayed when an error occurs The set status of the parameter data is displayed 12 70 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT
122. 1234567 01294 012 012 0 Ole 01234567 01294 012 012 012 01234567 01294 012 012 0 013 01234567 01294 012 012 013 01234567 01294 012 012 0 014 01234567 01234 012 012 0 014 01234567 01294 012 012 0 015 01234567 01294 012 012 0 015 01234567 01234 012 012 0 016 01234567 01234 012 012 0 016 01234567 01234 012 012 0 017 01234567 01294 012 012 0 017 01234567 01294 012 012 0 018 01234567 01294 012 012 018 01234567 01294 012 012 0 019 01234567 01234 012 012 0 019 01234567 01294 012 012 0 020 01254567 01294 012 012 0 020 01234567 01234 012 012 0 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal X axis Y axis 1 The set value of the positioning address for each data number is displayed 5072 to 5111 7072 to 7111 2 The set value of the positioning speed for each data number is displayed 4272 to 4291 6272 to 6291 3 The set value of the dwell time for each data number is displayed 4672 to 4691 6672 to 6691 4 The set value of the M code for each data number is displayed 3872 to 3891 5872 to 5891 The 4 bits where the set status of the positioning pattern the positioning method and the positioning direction for each data number is stored are displayed in hexadecimal format When F is displayed b15 bO MET M code housed MEE 5 DPositioning pattern 3872 to 3891 5872 to 5891 00 Positioning complete 01 Positioning continu
123. 15 M5 T 120 L D M3 121 P K2147483647 D 10 0 0 m Input area p Display example for DWOVP K2147483647 D1000 pe or key Wi moves to the specified direction left right with 3 12 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT In this operating manual the List editor function key is represented in the following abbreviation form 1 Expression of Key 1 Key 2 Key n means the sequential input from Key 1 to Keyn 2 Expression of Key 1 Key 2 means input of Key 1 and Key 2 at the same time 3 As in key or key keys with dual functions for input of the command or the device constant or control keys that control the List editor function are represented as follows a The mode command or only alphanumeric characters are described Example PST RST or 0 MOV or b Only commands are shown for explanation of command input Alphanumeric characters are omitted Only alphanumeric characters are shown for explanation of alphanumeric characters Command expressions are omitted Example To express key When input of command is explained MOV When input of alphanumeric characters is explained M 3 13 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 5 5 Display format on the display The following describes the position and content of each data field in the display ar
124. 1PT32 S3 12 24 1 I O monitor I O mode SETZ Data MONIT 2 53 I O Monitor Scr 1 0 Dedicated Mode RESET Che menu END Inputs X Outputs Y 1 00 Hardware Fault 10 0 10 EM Link Working 1 1 1 2 2 2 13 3 13 4 4 4 ME Test Mode 5 5 5 E Link Error Detectit6 6 16 Link Comms Errar 7 7 8 ME Link Comms Start 19 9 19 A A FROM TO Response B B ME Faulty Sta Clear 1C 1 My Error Reset E E LF s 1F No Contents of display The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU of the master module is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reversed display 12 99 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 24 2 Monitoring the link status Data MONIT 1 2 53 Link Data Monitor Screen 1 4 No of Remote Stations 01 Communication Error Code 01 4 Accumulative Faulty Station Detection Remate I D Units Card Data m 0 Normal 1 Error 11 16 1011011011011011 16 90110110110110110 32 170110110110110110 5 2 4 1701101 201 031 10 1110 48 330110110110 2 2501101 10 110 10110 64 490110110110 3801101 10110110110 HB 4210110110110110110 Faulty station Detection ss B6 490110110110110110 ______ FEDCBA S 701104 10 E10 10 1 10 Neuer diu 16 10110110110110110 32 170110110110110110 6 Card Data 00 No remate unit or no 48 3301
125. 2 3 2 3 Names of devices to be MOntored eroriaren nna EE 3 2 3 2 4 Precautions when using the system monitor function sseseeenenne 3 2 3 3 Special module monitor function specifications 3 4 3 3 1 Access ranges to be monitored nennen 3 4 3 3 2 Special function modules to be 22 3 4 3 3 3 Memory capacity required for using the special module monitor function 3 5 3 3 4 Precautions when using the special module monitor function 3 6 3 4 Network monitor function specifications ssessssseeeeeeeeeeeeennennnennnnnnnen nennen 3 8 3 4 1 Network information to be monitored ssessssseeeeeeeeeeneennennen nennen 3 8 3 4 2 Access ranges to be monitored rennen 3 9 3 4 3 Precautions when using the network monitor function eene 3 9 3 5 List editor function specifications essent nennen rennen nnns 3 10 3 5 1 PLC CPU that allows for list edit 3 10 3 5 2 Access range that allows for list edit seen 3 10 3 5 3 Precautions for List editor function nennen 3 10 3 5 4 List of key arrangement and key functions 3 11 3 5 5 Display tomaton the display einan a nennen 3 14 3 5 6 bist of Elst editor UNCION our nu ren rog gen err eed 3 17 OPERATING
126. 45 345 The zero return data is displayed b15 b4 bO 15 7918 7928 Method where return is complete when stopper stops Zero return direction Zero return method 16 The set value of the torque limit is displayed 7917 7927 17 The set value of the dwell time is displayed 7916 7926 12 69 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 21 3 Parameter data monitor SET Data HONIT AD 1 Parameter Data Monitor Screen RESET Ehg MENU END X v Unus d MW Axis Y Axis ABCODEFF REUS cuerpo cos DEDDTEDTTOETODIO 16 MIPosit Start Iravel Pulse 4 01234557 01234567 a InterpolationInching Trav 0123456783 0123456789 Y ABCODEFF Posit Compl ee A 0110110110110110 16 Speed Limit 5 01234567 01234567 1 zero Request Jo Spd Limit 6 01234567 01234567 R Pulse O P zero Start lee e UE q repense aan 0 B Type zero Completefcc Dec Time 7 01234567 01234567 1h Type deMece 4 B H Code Timing ii Fud Jog StartBacklash Comp 8 01234567 01234567 0 HITH Mode d Rev Jog Stanrte 0 e eA ur E 1 AFTER pper Limit 9 0123456799 0123456783 Code ON OFF B Stop ower Limit 10 0123456789 0123456789 OFF 1 ON eee M RN CREE DD Posit Method Error Comp 11 0129456789 0123456789 00 RBS 01 INC MM MM PeeeM M eeve 10 ABS INC Starting Bias 12 01234567 0
127. 4M and A9GT FNB8M type option function Describes specifications part names and installation of A9GT FNB 1M 2M 4M 8M with ASGT FNB 1M 2M 4M 8M Add on memory board for A9GT QFNB A9GT QFNB4M and A9GT QFNB8M type option function Describes specifications part names and installation of A9GT QFNB 4M 8M with ASGT QFNB 4M 8M A9GT 70KBF Type External I O Interface Unit User s Manual Describes specifications system configurations part names and installation wiring methods of A9GT 70KBF with ASGT 70KBF A8GT 50KBF Type External I O Interface Unit User s Manual Describes specifications system configurations part names and installation wiring methods of A8GT 50KBF with ABGT 50KBF A9GT 50PRF type printer interface unit user s manual Describes specifications system configuration part names installation method and external dimensions of ASGT 50PRF with ASGT 50PRF A8GT TK Type Numerical Keypad Panel User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of ABGT TK with ABGT TK A9GT QCNB Type bus connector conversion box User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of ASGT QCNB with ASGT QCNB A7GT CNB Type bus connector conversion box User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of A7GT CNB with A7GT CNB Manual number Model code 18 68975 13JM91 1B 0800051 13JQ62 IB 80018 13JQ14 18 66787 137128 18 0800019 133028 18 66832 1315
128. 5535 01234 01234 01234 msec i lect ed pullll 2llllllll2 l 2 llplelrfll2 icn ll22l0i 0l2l1b 200 0222 023202222 cee 3 Decel Time 0 to 65535 01234 01234 01234 msec 1 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal Axis 3 The maximum speed for the positioning operation also including zero return and the manual pulser operation is displayed With the positioning operation the acceleration time 0 from 8 speed 0 until the speed limit has been attained is displayed 9 With the positioning operation the deceleration time 0 from the 10 speed limit to 0 speed is displayed 11 6 7 12 83 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 4 Extended parameter monitor 1 Extended parameter 1 SET Data MONIT aADTSP Basic Parameter 2 RESET Chg menu ENO Parameter Valid Range laxis ensis 15 1 to 600000000 10 5 mm min t 1 to 600000000 Speed Limit 10 3 inch min 1 to 600000000 012345678 012345675 012345678 10 3 deg min 0 to 1000000 PLS sec cler ee eee ee ee remi Seek Shoe eels ee ee he tele cole eat Leere n Decel Time 0 to 65535 01234 012934 i 01234 msec i Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The machine backlash comp
129. 56GOT unit e To confirm the error codes of A950GOT A951GOT 953GOT A956GOT unit To know the outline dimension drawing of A950GOT A951GOT 953GOT A956GOT unit A 4 GOT A900 Series User s Manual SW4D5C GOTR PACKE compatible Connection System Manual To know the connection forms available for the GOT A900 series VY Contained in the To confirm the specifications of each connection form SW4D5C GOTR PACKE To know the system configuration of each connection form po as PDF data To know how to set the unit used To confirm the connection diagrams of the connection cables The printed matter is also available as an option SW4D5C GOTR PACKE V Operating Manual To install the software into the personal computer To start each software To know how to connect the personal computer GOT e To know the screen makeup of the software To grasp the outline of various monitoring functions To know the procedure of displaying the monitor screen To know how to use the help function Found in the packing of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE Contained also in the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE as PDF data SW4D5C GOTR PACKE Help Functions SW4D5C GOTR PACKE To confirm how to operate each software of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE To confirm how to set various object functions Incorporated in each software of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE GOT A900 Series Operating Manual SW4D5C G
130. 6 0123 K 103 123 K 125 0129 K 141 123 K 157 01293 K 110 0123 126 0123 K 142 0123 158 01253 111 0123 127 0123 K 143 0123 159 0123 K 112 0123 128 0123 144 0123 K 160 0123 K 113 0123 129 0129 K 145 01293 151 0123 K 114 H 0123 K 130 0123 146 0123 162 0123 K 115 0123 131 0123 K 147 0123 163 0123 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The contents of the data storage area are displayed in address modules 4100 The illustration above shows the results when the CH 1 side is monitored 100 to 163 to Addresses are displayed in decimal format and data in hexadecimal format 4163 12 104 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 25 2 I O monitor SET Data MONIT END AJ 1ID Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Chg MENU cx wet H1 ID Command Exe ID Error ID READY He ID Command Exe D D C2 C3 CB TD C8 J cn cn R co n3 gt C3 CB 2D 0 C0 J Cn dn amp C30 P9 0 Contents of display An I O signal is ON when it is displayed in a reverse display The ON OFF status for the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed 12 105 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 25 3 Monitoring set
131. 62DA module monitor 12 6 1 Operation monitor SET Gata MONIT END A1S620A Operation Monitor Screen RESET chg MENU 2 3 Analog Output Enable Disable Channel 1 Channel 2 Digital I F Digital I P 1 Channel No 21 0110110110110110 012345 012345 HOT Error Flag CHe DA Output Enable Flag 4 1 0 Conversion READY CH1 D A Output Enable Flag Error Flag Error Reset Y Output X AC utput X Channel 1 0 5 100 Channel 1 0 1 L 1 4000 4000 8 6 17 8000 8000 9 7 L L 1 12000 212000 10 Channel 2 0 50 100 Channel 2 5 14 4000 4000 8 6 17 8000 8000 9 7 1 12000 f12000 10 CH1 Check Code CHe Check Code 0123 0123 Resolution Setting O 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 11 12 13 Contents of displ Buffer memory address ontents of displa dud to reference decimal The specified enable disable status for the analog output of each channel is displayed 0 Enable 1 Disable The channel 1 digital input value is displayed The channel 2 digital input value is displayed The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display The current input value a value between 4000 to 4000 for the digital input value of channels 1 and 2 is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from 0 to
132. 890 3 2 Phase I P X2 O 1ijpies456789001234567890 0 1 pD1234567830012345867830 G 2 123456789001234567850 G 2 012945678900 123456 7890 4 2 Phase I P X 4 3 0129456 78300123456 7830 3 12345678900 129456 7890 4 Buffer memory address Contents ePi play to reference decimal The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display A E is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs A F is displayed when a writing data error occurs the channel where it occurred and the error code are displayed The number of multi dogs that are set is displayed 12 to 147 The set value for the on position and off position of the multi dog no is displayed for each channel The specified status of the counter function selection is displayed 5 The limit switch output status of each channel is displayed 0 OFF 1 ON The current value of the counter is displayed for the following situations in pulse input mode when preset when the ring counter function is being executed and when the counter is disabled The count value for execution of the latch counter sampling counter and periodic pulse counter set with the counter function selection 5 is displayed The preset value is displayed The ring counter value that was set is displayed The set status of the pulse input mode is displayed 11 12 to 147
133. AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT 8 When connected to the CPU in MELSECNET 10 An error in the MELSECNET 10 is reported using a four digit hexadecimal error number For details of the errors and corrective actions see the MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual mw If an error code not listed in the previous page is displayed contact the nearest of our system service centers agents and branch offices 21 6 INDEX A Adaptor 4 8 B Batch monitor esses 9 10 BM monitor sss 9 14 Brightness contrast adjustment of monitor screen 4 3 Brightness contrast adjustment screen 4 16 Buzzer sound 2 4 8 C Capacity of special module monitor data 3 5 Connection transmission speed 4 8 Clock setting sss 4 12 D Deleting a registered device 9 9 Detailed own station monitor 17 3 Entry monitor see 9 7 Error display and handling Ladder monitor function 7 1 Network monitor function 18 1 Special module monitor function 14 1 System monitor function 10 1 List editor function 21 1
134. BD M3 Generic term of AB53GOT TBD A953GOT SBD A953GOT LBD A953GOT TBD M3 A953GOT SBD M3 and A953GOT LBD M3 Generic term of A951GOT TBD A951GOT SBD A951GOT LBD A951GOT TBD M3 A951GOT SBD M3 and A951GOT LBD M3 Generic term of A951GOT QTBD A951GOT QSBD A951GOT QLBD A951GOT QTBD M3 A951GOT QSBD M3 and A951GOT QLBD M3 Generic term of A950GOT TBD A950GOT SBD A950GOT LBD A950GOT TBD M3 A950GOT SBD M3 and A950GOT LBD M3 Generic term of AB53GOT SBD M3 H and A953GOT LBD M3 H 5 GOT Generic term of AB56GOT A953GOT A951GOT A951GOT Q A950GOT and A950 handy GOT Generic term of A985GOT A97 GOT A960GOT and A95 GOT gt gt gt gt gt c dc c c c c oy o oj o 49 3 2 al l l l b Q gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt N NINI ojojo ojojo Q9 O O QO O Q9 DIDID IDIOODID 348 111119 11119 11119 c UJ U2 02 U2 UJ UJ J 221919 212 o o oo c amp p a CF Abbreviation of GOT system software Abbreviation of ASGT QBUSS type bus connection board Memory Abbreviation of memory flash memory in the GOT Abbreviation of A9GT BUSS type bus connection board Abbreviation of ASGT BUS2S type multi drop bus connection board Bus connection board Generic term of ASGT QBUSS A9GT QBUS2S A9GT BUSS and A9GT BUS2S Abbreviation of A9GT RS4 type serial commun
135. CIAL MODULE MONITORING MELSEC GOT Chapter14 Error display and handling with special module monitoring The following chart shows the error messages that may be displayed when operating the special module monitor and the method of handling them Error message Description Method of Handling Can not Communication could To try the operation again Communication not be established with touch Retry When the the PLC CPU operation is retried the error message disappears and monitoring resumes automatically so no action is required If monitoring is not resumed for a long period of time however check the following 1 Connections between the PLC CPU and the GOT disconnected or cut cables 2 Has an error occurred in the PLC CPU Etc 14 1 14 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SPECIAL MODULE MONITORIN S G SPEC ODU ONITORING MELSEC GOT MEMO 14 2 15 OPERATING THE NETWORK MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT Chapter15 Operating the network monitor function This chapter describes how to operate the network monitor function 15 1 Steps in getting started with the network monitor function The following flowchart outlines how to transmit and install an operating system OS for the network monitor function in the GOT internal memory using the Personal computer For further information on screen displays and key operations see the online help of the drawing software Start v Connect the GOT and
136. CNET MELSECNET MELSECNET MELSECNET Function Network Information II B Master II B Local 10 Control 10 Ordinary 10 Remote Station Station Station Station Master Station Network category display Network No display Station No display Own station operation mode Own station monitor Own station loop line status Loop back execution status Link scan time display Data link system loop status Own station communications status Own station s station No Own station Own station information Network No Group No Specified control station Control Current control station station Communications information information Sub control station link Remote l O master station station No Total of linked stations Largest connected station Data link Largest data linked station information Communications status win Causes of interrupted communications station Causes of data link stoppage Constant link monitor Constant link scan BWY from the master station BW from the master station in the higher loop F loop status R loop status Loopback F loopbackstation 1 o R loopback station o e x gt J o Loop switching frequency 1 o x o o X f Detailed ion S en Communicationsmode x Xx o o o Designation of transmission Transmission status x x o o O x Communications status of each staton o
137. CPU unit Toshiba PLC Generic term of T3 T3H CPU unit SIEMENS PLC Generic term of SIMATIC S7 300 Series and SIMATIC S7 400 Series CPU unit Other PLC Generic term of Omron PLC Yasukawa PLC Allen Bradley PLC Sharp PLC Toshiba PLC and S SIEMENS PLC CPU unit SW4D5C GOTR PACKE Generic term of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE software package and SWAD5C GOTR PACKEV software package Abbreviation of image creation software GOT Screen Designer for GOT900 Abbreviation of data conversion software GOT Converter for GOT900 Debug software Abbreviation of debugging software GOT Debugger Setting data for dynamic image Windows95 Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows95 Windows98 Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows98 Windows NT4 0 Abbreviation of Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 Generic term of Windows95 Windows98 and Windows NT4 0 Acrobat Reader Abbreviation of Adobe Acrobat Reader3 0 2 Personal Computer Windows compatible Personal Computer that can install SW4D5C GOTR PACKE 1 Microsoft Windows95 Microsoft Windows98 and Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4 0 are the trademarks of Microsoft Corporation U S 2 Adobe and Adobe Acrobat are the trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated C 1998 Adobe Systems Incorporated All right reserved 7 Manual The following manuals related to this product are available Obtain the manuals as required the according to this table e Related manual Manual number Model code A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960G
138. Che MENU END Input 3 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 i Channel 8 s B hoT Error Buffer memory address No f Contents a display to reference decimal The current output value a value between 0 to 2000 for the digital output value of each channel is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from 10 to 17 0 to 100 A I is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs E 12 29 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 12 A1S68AD module monitor 12 12 1 Operation monitor Data MONIT A1S68AD Movement Monitor Screen RESET Che meny END C H Bo 9 ee 1 A D Conversion O1101101 i 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 2 A D Method Sampling Averaging 3 Averaging 01101101 gt Number Time 4 A D Conversion 01101101 i 0 Incomplete 1 Complete E diy Averaging Time Number Input Status x CH 1 01234 i 01234 6 CH Ovese Oles4 6 CH 3 012333 i m1e54 6 CH 4 21254 Oji1zc3d 85 EH 5 5 01234 i 6g 901234 6 EH 01 2334 Oles4 6 CH 7 Ovese Oles4 6 CH 8 6012333 H 12 94 6G Error Code mic 7 Buffer memory address No Contents of displ to reference decimal The A D conversion enabled disabled status of each channel is displayed wm c1 2 The specified status for the averaging processing
139. Detect 12 We Undertlow Detect 13 1 We Resolver Direct 14 Wel Como Val Exceeds Resolver Error 16 Error Detect 17 CHO ON OFF Statusda CH1 ON OFF Statusda He ON OFF Statusin CH3 ON OFF StatusiB CH4 ON OF usilC CHS ON OFF StatusiD CHE ON OFF StatusiE CH ON OFF StatusiF AMM C3 CD Tb 00 AMM amp T 1 u En The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 9 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 3 AD61 module monitor 12 3 1 Operation monitor SET Data MONIT AD61 Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che menu END Present Value Set Value Mode Channel 01234567 1 01234567 2 1 1 Phase Channel 2 01234567 01234567 2 2 Phase Inputs X Yl Count Greater lo 0 CH1 Equal Rese 4 CH1 Count Equal 1 1 CH1 Preset Cmd CH1 Count Less 2 2 CH1 Equal O P CH1 Ext Preset 3 3 CH1 Down Count CH2 Count Greaterli4 4 CH1 Count Enable CH2 Count Equal 5 5 CH1 Value Read CH2 Count Less 6 6 CH1 Ext Prese CH2 Ext Preset 7 E CH2 Equal Rese 8 CH2 Preset Cmd 8 8 CH2 Equal O P A A CH2 Down Count B B CHe Count Enable CH2 Value Read D D CH2 Ext Prese E E F F Buffer memory address to reference decimal 4 5 36 37 6 7 38 39 3 35
140. Display contents and keys functions other station monitor menu This section describes the other station monitor menu screen and the function of on Screen keys The menu screen for the other station monitor is displayed by touching a module number displayed on the own station monitor screen The menu screen provides many options for the other station monitor 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT mu E CPU RUN Touch Key 1 Communications Status Com Status D Link P MTR CPU OP Display example Another Sta Menu COM STA D Link P MTR CPU OP CPU RUN Loop Contents of Display Switches to a monitor screen that shows the communications status of other stations 2 Data Link Switches to a monitor screen that shows the data link status of other stations 3 Parameters Switches to a monitor screen that shows the parameter status of other stations 4 CPU Action Switches to a monitor screen that shows the CPU action status of other stations CPU RUN Switches to a monitor screen that shows the CPU RUN status of other stations 6 Loop Switches to a monitor screen that shows the loop status of other stations This is selectable when connected to a MELSECNET B or MELSECNE
141. EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 13 3 Graph monitor SETZ Data MONIT amp 688DN Graph Monitor Screen RESET Che END Resolution 1 2 3 Input X 50 100 100 0 50 100 Channel 1 m i m i Channel 2 Hmmm Channel 3 1 Channel 4 es Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 m Channel 8 Resolution Selection B Error T HDT Error 2 3 4 Buffer memory address Comens ordisplay to reference decimal The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output 1 value of each channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 10 to 17 Resolution selection 2 0 to 8000 3 0 to 12000 2 The set resolution selection is displayed 20 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 A is displayed when a writing data error occurs is displayed when watchdog timer error occurs O 12 35 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 14 A68RD module monitor 12 14 1 Operation monitor SET Data MONIT amp 68RD Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END Temp Value Disabled Enabled 897654321 32 bits Count 0110110110110110 Temp Value 16 bits 1 0123 567 2 3 01234 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Conversion 87654321 0110110110110110 1 Completed 0 No
142. EDURES FOR THE SYSTEM MONITOR 8 1108 2 8 1 Operation procedures before starting system monitoring esee 8 1 8 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of system mortorii aar ane etre es ila eel Aa eed 8 2 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS 9 1to9 22 9 1 Screen configuration common operations and changing screens when monitoring 9 1 9 1 1 Basic screen configuration and key functions menu eee 9 1 9 1 2 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal and turning the comment display on off FORM nennt 9 2 9 1 3 Specifying the monitor station and device SET 9 4 91 4 CHANGING SCreers eet rtm ei tenete E eei a npe Peer 9 6 9 2 Eny monto a a 9 7 9 2 1 Basic operation nsus 9 7 9 2 2 Entry monitor screen display and key functions 9 8 9 2 3 Deleting a registered 9 9 9 3 Batclimobltorzs do t mt t taut tetas ut tetas 9 10 9 341 Basic operations coin eR eoa 9 10 9 3 2 Batch monitor screen display and key functions eee 9 11 9 4 TC Monitor monitor of timer and counter nennen 9 12 9 4 1 Basic
143. ENTM 17 5 acting as a Aat uta EU AA ALIE Tin 17 8 M TE TE he ae i ut ls ee ee 17 11 other station monitor 17 11 other station communication status monitor 17 12 other station data link status monitor 17 18 other station parameter status monitor 17 14 other station CPU action status monitor 17 15 other station CPU RUN status monitor 17 16 other station loop status 17 17 18 ERROR DISPLAYS AND COUNTERMEASURES WHEN MONITORING NETWORKS sssssssssseeeeeeeenneeeen nennen neret 18 11t0 18 2 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION 19 110 19 6 19 1 Operation procedures before starting the list edit sssssssseseeeenenens 19 1 19 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to starting list editing 19 2 19 2 1 Operation of keyword input sse nennen nnne 19 3 19 2 2 Selection and operation of mode nennen 19 5 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST 20 1 to 20 16 20 1 Basic operation of key input ssssssssssssesseeseeeeenenennee nennen enne nennen tnnt nennen nennt 20 1 20 1 1 Switching of valid key function indicated at the upper lower part of the key 20 1
144. ES FOR THE LADDER MONITORSFUNG TION ii ete uo Quit aig eec iet ea ue ctae 5 1t05 2 5 1 Operation procedures before starting ladder monitoring eee 5 1 5 2 Operation procedures from display of user created monitor screen to start of ladder monitoring 5 2 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS 6 1to6 20 6 1 Screen operation and screen changes when monitoring sse 6 1 6 1 1 Reading data from the PLO essen enne nnne tnnt nnns nnns 6 1 6 1 2 Ladder read operation sese rennen nnns 6 7 6 1 3 Using the defect search sssssssssssseeeeeeeneennee nennen 6 10 6 1 4 Changing from one screen to another sss 6 13 6 2 Ladder moriitor snum ae anaes 6 14 6 2 1 Ladder monitor screen display and key 6 14 6 2 2 Precaution during ladder monitoring eene 6 16 6 2 3 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal and turning the comment display on off essen 6 17 6 2 4 Changing the device value sss nennen nnne tnnt 6 18 6 2 5 M 6 19 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH LADDER MONITORING 7 1to7 2 OPERATION PROC
145. Ecuea a E B4Sta LocSta OSta RmtSt NETWK No 1 Rmt VO Net MELSECNET 10 n MELSECNET 2 a i a 2 Network information can be obtained from the own station monitor screen Dedicated monitor screens are available for each category of station classification depending on the role that is played by the own station Network category MELSECNET B MELSECNET 11 master station MELSECNET B MELSECNET 1 local station MELSECNET 10 control station ordinary station MELSECNET 10 remote master station Sample display MELSECNET B MELSECNET II master station Petail Info TsSt Unita This Station s This Station s Master 1 14 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 3 The status of other stations can be monitored on the other station monitor screen The other station monitor screen provides the following type of information on the status of other stations connected on a network e Communications status of each station Data link status of each station e Parameters status of each station CPU action status of each station e CPU RUN status of each station Loop status of each station Sample display Other station monitor menu screen al 00 0 Com Status D Link P MTR CPU OP w CPU RUN Loop Other station s communications status monitor screen
146. GOT 17 7 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 2 4 Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET 10 remote master station This section describes the detailed own station monitor screen and the function of on Screen keys all of which are displayed and used when the own station acts as the remote master station on the MELSECNET 10 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used The display details are the same TEE as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT Touch 5 button to change the ropes m Fp Back Sta 2x display Curr Ctrl Sta Com Info po g 15 1 Ctrl Sta Com Le Dis play example Detail Info tsst unit in Mode Constant LS Transmission Mode Normal Trans Total of L Sta Pd Transmission Stat Normal Trans Largest DL Sta Com Status Cause of Ssp 3 64 D Link in prog Normal Normal Cause of Stop Section Contents of Display eThis Stations Indicates the station number of the own station TsSt Info e Network Indicates the network number Group Not displayed Spc Ctrl Sta Not displayed e Curr Ctrl Sta Not displayed Com Info Not displayed SubCirl Sta Com Not displayed Ctrl St Info 17 8 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS Section D Link Info MELSEC GOT Contents of Display e Total of L Sta Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be l
147. GOTR PACKE compatible Connection system manual 3 5 3 Precautions for List editor function Precautions for the List editor function are as follows 1 Precaution for reading with the specified command The command cannot be specified to read the ladder 2 Precaution for use with the ladder monitor function If list edit is performed while the ladder monitor function is started the edit details are not shown on the ladder monitor screen To show the edit details the ladder monitor must be read from the PLC again 3 Precaution for list edit While the corresponding PLC is at stop status perform list edit The list cannot be edited during PLC running 4 Precaution for parameter changing on the other peripheral device If parameter settings are changed on the other peripheral device during use of the list edit function they will be different from the settings of the internal parameters of the list edit function For this reason reset the GOT unit or make PC No setting again to read the parameters 3 10 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 5 4 List of key arrangement and key functions Key arrangement and key functions of the list edit window are shown below When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used 1 Control key 2 Mode key key for selection of mode 4 Command key upper character Device key lower character
148. H a pe oeei B 07 Error 2 Buffer memory address f m coments odi pIRy to reference decimal The current output value a value between 0 to 2000 for the digital output value of each channel is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from 20 to 27 0 to 100 A I is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs E 12 32 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 13 A68ADN module monitor 12 13 1 Operation monitor MELSEC GOT R58 Cha ADN Operation Monitor Screen nnel 9765432 set ting 0110 10110110110 SET Data MONIT RESET Che END O Disabled 1 Enabled Cha set Samp le Average Coun 3218765432 10110110110 57654 0110 nnel ting Time Sample Average O Samoling 1TiAverag ing Count Time i 0 Count Average 1 Time Average Count Time Input Status X Input Status X Input Status X Value Resolution 1 Resolution 2 Resolution 3 Channel 1 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 2 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 3 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 1 4 01234 4 0123 5 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 5 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 6 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 7 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 8 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Error Code di Resolu
149. IOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 1 2 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal and turning the comment display on off FORM 1 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal Display the word device present value or the timer counter present value or set value in decimal or hexadecimal 2 Switching the comment display on and off Display the comment that is written in the object PLC CPU Comment display priority order expanded comment Japanese character comment or Japanese kana comment When changing to hexadecimal display When changing to comment display DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 15 H 80000000 D 200 50 n D 10 H 8001 Production line A X 001 e W 200 43 M 25 Production quantity Y 70 e R50 68378428 DW W 200 H 002B link status R 50 H 04135 X10 100 C 200 H 7000 Production line B M When the monitoring destination is being operated with the following conditions using the QnA series CPU take note that the comment display cannot be performed Conditions When executing multiple programs multiple comment files exist and all comment files are set as same file name being used as program When performing the comment display use the comment file with a set specification 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Below is an expla
150. Inputthe drive number 1 5 4 internal RAM 1 4 memory card AC Clear all input data on the drive Define the input 7 The file list of the selected drive is displayed Select the ladder to h be read with the following keys E EUN 1 Move the cursor upward Ss 133906 10 17 40 C LI Y Move the cursor downward MONITOR Program 2164 1999 06 10 17 43 Monitor System Page 4 5 Page Display the previous page Coment 1908 1999 06 10 13 02 ib Lime n P V Di age y_ Display the next page SEL Move the cursor and touch the key to change select cancel READ _ Start reading the selected ladder When a keyword is registered at the PLC CPU a key window is displayed at the start of reading Input the keyword It does not have to be input if it is not registered Y PLC B NETHORKNo 0 ST FF RERD SELECTION 2 8 Contents and capacity of the reading process displayed Lene ad Touch Break to stop the reading process EE EE To read the ladder again start from the beginning INITIAL Program E 6 KAKOU Program 6 10 1 Lii M CNET A EET 9 When the message Completed is displayed reading is HANSOU Program 3108 1999 06 10 17 40 C Line KENSA Program 2184 1999 06 10 17 42 D Line i Coment 2284 1998 06 10 17 45 ALIE completed
151. M Code Comment Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END 3 ANY 4 fixis M Code 12 Y fixis Code 012 X fixis Posit Start 01 ABCDEFGHIJKLHNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Executing Interpolation 02 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Data Mo 012 I 5 Posit Compl 03 BBCDEFGHIJKLMNUP BBCDEFBHIJKLMNUP 04 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Pointer 012 6 1 Zero Return 05 ABDDEFBHIJKLMNDP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Zero Star 06 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Error Code 012 7 zero Complete 07 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Fud Jog Start 08 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP BBCDEFBHIJKLMNDP Status 012 8 Rev Joz Start 094 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Stop 10 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Y Axis 11 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ed 12 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Executing 18 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Data No 012 E 14 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP S in position 15 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Pointer 012 Excessive 16 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP 17 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Error Code 012 HDT Err Man Pulse 18 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Batt ErrM Hi 19 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP Status 012 Error i i Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse
152. MITSUBISHI GOT A900 Series Operating Manual SW4D5C GOTR PACKE compatible Extended Option Functions Manual xc Operation T oie E ermin 900 series MITSUBISHI Graphic Operation Terminal e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the CPU module user s manual In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION woe N Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions lt gt DANGER resulting in death or severe injury CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage Note that the NCAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user PRECAUTION WHEN PERFORMING THE TEST OPERATION e Read the manual carefully and fully understand the operation before t
153. NU END HOT Error nline Posit Start Sensor BIN Pos 012945 4 Posit Stop Fud Jog Start i Scaling BIN Pas 012345 5 Rev Jog Start i Target Stop Pos 012345 6 3 FEDCBAIS 76543210 LS Output 0110110110110110 L8 Setting 0110110110110110 Prg Mo 0 Op Mode 43210 Aback 0 0110110110110110 2 ON CH 0 OFF MAX ON CH 1 OFF ON CH 2 OFF MAX ON CH 3 OFF 10 o1 01 01 01 0 1012345 012345 0 1012345 012345 0 010345 010345 0 1012345 012345 1 1012545 012345 1 1012945 012945 1 1012945 012945 1 012345 012945 2 012345 012345 2 1012945 012345 2 1012945 012345 2 012345 012345 D 3 012345 012345 DD 3 012345 012345 D 3 012345 012345 D 3 012345 012345 O 4 012345 012345 0 4 1012345 012345 0 4 012345 012345 0 4 012345 012345 G 5 1012345 012345 G 5 1012345 012345 5 012345 012345 G 5 1012345 012345 012945 012345 6 1012945 012345 6 012345 Ol12345 012345 012345 1012945 012345 7 1012945 012345 7 2945 012945 7 2945 012345 8 1012345 012345 8 1012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 9 012345 012345 3 1012345 012345 9 1012345 012345 Contents of display Buffer memory address to reference decimal The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display T
154. Normalily Character ON string Action display X000 0002 ON OFF status display for ladder monitor oad ON status d 9 Ak OFF status es lt gt 1H Ready Start display operation instruction K25 T0 gt Operation start P 5 The MCR command is normally displayed as 4L 3 Ext PLCRD Mon Menu G E Screen Print Sequence program is displayed A maximum of 11 contact points is displayed in one line of a ladder for 12 contact points or more move to the next line When a comment display is specified a comment is also displayed expanded comments are given priority For the method of displaying comments see Sec 6 2 3 A maximum of eight devices is displayed for the word device current value timer and counter current value upper row and set value lower row When the set value is an indirect specification the value of the indirectly specified device is displayed To switch between decimal and hexadecimal for the displayed value see Sec 6 2 3 Display the keys used with the operation on the ladder monitor screen shown in b Touch input The network No and the station No are displayed The drive is displayed The file name of the PLC program is displayed The total number of steps in the current monitor PLC program is displayed b Key functions This table shows the key functions used with the operations on the
155. OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 SW8 SW7 SWe SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 Swi ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON gt 2 o o 2 c im c Contents of display 12 66 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 20 4 I O monitor SET Data MONIT amp D70D Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che menu ENO Inputs X Outputs Y m uo Upper Limit LS Lower Limit LS LF Error 10 0 zero Rtn star READY 1 1 Posit Start 1 zero Rtn Reguest L 2 Forward Start zero Rtn Comple t3 3 Reverse Start BUSY 4 4 Fudd Jog Star Posit Complete 15 5 Rev Jog Star In position 16 6 Vel Pos Restart zero Return 7 7 Stop Error Detection 18 8 Error Reset Overt Lou 19 3 Overt low Rese Underf low A A Underflow Reset Servo Ready B B Serva OFF Near Zero Point 1 Switchover Stop External D PLC READY E F Contents of display 1 The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 67 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 21 AD71 Module monitor 12 21 1 Positioning monitor SET Data MONIT 071 Positioning Data Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END ELM 3 4 KY Deus pM ARIS OY Axis x Y Li
156. ONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT 21 3 Error using list editor function on the link system When the list editor function is used on the link system the PLC communication error may appear In this case check the error details and the corrective actions Error No Error message Action Time out error ae 2 Check the cable wiring No response to the request New process request was given to the list editor function while the CPU is processing GOT eee A sum check error from the link communication has occurred Check the system again 16 PLC No error Check the PLC number setting Set There is no station corresponding to the PLC number the correct number This error may occur when the ACPU is reset during monitoring Perform the monitor setting again Remote error Although remote stop pause is performed from the computer link unit remote run stop is additionally performed Link error 32 AR y n Perform the monitor setting again While the slave station is monitoring the master station the master station is reset 34 EEPROM failure Replace the EEPROM with a new The EEPROM cannot be written due to EEPROM failure one If error number 25 appears the following causes are possible Check the details and the corrective actions Perform the remote run stop pause from either unit When connected to the master station Device ES Description Details number The control depends on whether
157. OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 22 3 Parameter data monitor SET Data MONIT 8D72 819D71 Parameter Data Monitor Screen Che MENU END UUeens i Kk Axis i X ABCDDEFF E 0110110110110110 16 Posit Start Travel Pulse 3 01234567 01234567 Posit Start Inching Trav 4 01234567893 0123456189 Y ABCDDEFF Posit Compl RM 0110110110110110 16 Speed Limit 5 01234567 01234567 1 zero Request Jog Spd Limit 6 0 234567 1 01234567 A Pulse Mode Start artes 0 B Type sero CompleteRcc Dec Time 7 01234567 01234567 1 A Type Fud Jog etabt ies RE TM ME as UR E B M Code Timing gj Rev Jog StartBacklash Comp 8 01234567 01234567 0 WITH Mode Stop pepe 1 AFTER Mode pper Limit 01234567839 0123456783 Code ON OFF dig Pos Started Lower Limit 012345678910p123456789 0 OFF 1 ON BUSY eee DD Posit Methad Code ON Error Comp 11 0129456789 0123456789 00 ABS 01 INC EIn position 00 prsscepinencuen Pac EM 10 RBS INC Excessive ErrBtarting Bias 12 01234567 01234567 E Direction I peque MM D Fwd 1 Rev Err Man Pulsebompl D0 P Time 13 01234567 Modulesetting p AERE renee 00 mm 01 inch Mcode ErrCode 012 01 012 01 10 deg 11 PLS
158. OT User s Manual Explains the specifications general system configuration component devices part names option unit loading methods installation and wiring methods maintenance and inspection methods and error codes of A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit SH 4005 13JL70 Available as option A950GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT User s Manual Explains the specifications general system configuration component devices part names option unit loading methods installation and wiring methods maintenance and inspection methods and error codes of AB50GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT unit SH 080018 13JL92 Available as option GOT A900 Series User s Manual SW4D5C GOTR PACKE compatible Connection System Manual Gives the specifications system configuration setting method and connection diagram of each SH 080070 connection form available for the GOT A900 series 13JR11 Available as option GOT A900 Series Operating Manual SW4D5C GOTR PACKE compatible Extended e Option Functions Manual Provides the specifications of the utility system monitoring ladder monitoring special function unit monitoring network monitoring functions and list editor functions available for the GOT A900 series and how to operate the dedicated monitor screen SH 080069 13979 Available as option SW4D5C GOTR PACKE V Operating Manual Deals with how to install and start the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE its system configuration the screen makeup of the software p
159. OTR PACKE compatible Extended e Option Functions Manual To perform the utility function 7 Contained in the To perform the system monitoring function SW4D5C GOTR PACKE To perform the ladder monitoring function 29 as PDF data To perform the special function unit monitoring function To perform the network monitoring function The printed matter is also available To perform the list editor function as an option GOT Operations Guide GOT Operations Guide To learn the sequence of operations by creating a simple screen using the drawing software the screen displays of the drawing Contained software introduced in the Operations Guide are partly different 4e GOT Operations Guide from those of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE Abbreviations generic terms and special terms used in this manual Abbreviations generic terms and special terms used in this manual are described as follows Abbreviations generic terms and Er Description special terms A985GOT Generic term of A985GOT TBA A985GOT TBD and A985GOT TBA EU A975GOT Generic term of A975GOT TBA B A975GOT TBD B A975GOT TBA A975GOT TBD and A975GOT TBA EU A970GOT Generic term of A970GOT TBA B A970GOT TBD B A970GOT TBA A970GOT TBD A970GOT SBA A970GOT SBD A970GOT LBA A970GOT LBD A970GOT TBA EU and A970GOT SBA EU A960GOT Generic term of AB56GOT TBD A956GOT SBD A956GOT LBD A956GOT TBD M3 A956GOT SBD M3 and A956GOT L
160. Print Cancel Screen Print Screen Print 6 17 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 2 4 Changing the device value D CAUTION e Read the manual carefully and fully understand the operation before the test operation ON OFF of bit devices modifying current value of a word device modifying timer counter setting modifying the current value or modifying the current value of a buffer memory of ladder monitor In addition never modify data in a test operation to a device which performs a crucial operation to the system It may cause an accident by a false output or malfunction Changing the device value on the screen during ladder monitoring is described Switches for the timer counter value display format decimal hexadecimal and the comment display for the corresponding device on off can be performed 1 Device value changing method The device value changing method during ladder monitoring is described below Circuit monitor Screen Display the ladder monitor screen by touching S LADDER 1 Display the screen shown in 2 by touching Menu 2 Display the test window by touching Test m Dev Sea Step Sea 16 32BIT Cont Sea End Sea 10 160 Exit Pcro Mon Menu Coil Sea FactSea Test o
161. ROLLER 4 When the GOT is connected to an AnNCPU or AnACPU a screen display shows a screen DATE 9707 B of the MELSECNET II network even when 4 Y you are connected to the MELSECNET 10 network the monitor screen shows the display contents of the MELSECNET Il Date of Function manufacture version 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT a Connection with QCPU QCPU Q Mode QCPU A Mode Ref Computer MELSEC MELSEC in wd a E connect corineciio connection connection 20 ec connectio connection Brightness Adjusting the brightness contrast Section contrast of a monitor screen 4 3 adjustment Message display Selecting a message display icd selection Screen amp Copying me screen on OS data OS copy between the internal memory and memory card Setu Setting a use environment of the P GOT 4 5 Running diagnostic checks on Section mn GOT hardware 4 6 Memory GOT memory cd information Screen pu Ls the display area sm cleanup cleanup screen Defining a password for limited Password access to the utility menu screen 4 10 Ladder Sequence program monitoring Section monitor using ladder signals 6 2 1 Decimal and hexadecimal display Display of word device values Section switching 6 2 3 Device comment display Device Changing of device values Section changing ging 6 2 4 Section Print out Printing of ladder Entry Monitoring of current values by Secion monitor pre regist
162. SEC GOT 2 For command code and device 1 Command gt SP gt DEVICE gt DEVICE No gt GO Ex When LD XO is input W 112 OUT t 112 K 123 113 gt NOP 114 NOP LD i x f o co W 112 K123 E 113 LD X0000 114 gt N0P 115 3 For commands other than above Input the SP key between the command and the device the source data and the destination data Ex 1 When FMOV K 2 DO K5 is input oa M 3 mmn oooz 1 1 1 1 v 227 p gt MOV Xx m m 2 DP 0 SPH KP 5 GO W 121 2 121 K 5 130 NOP 131 NOP Ex 2 When OUT T1 K10 is input W 112 K123 2 113 LD X0000 114p pNOP 115 NOP OUT gt T gt 1 KP 1p 0 GO 20 3 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT Ex 3 When MC N3 M6 is input Lo K P1 f 0 P9 SP PD 19 gt GO CO CO ms ARWW 4 Handling of devices M L and S Devices M L and S in the Test Monitor Write and Insert modes change the display depe
163. See Sec 9 6 9 15 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 6 Test Read the manual carefully and fully understand the operation before the test D CAUTION operation ON OFF of bit devices modifying current value of a word device modifying timer counter setting modifying the current value or modifying the current value of a buffer memory of system monitor In addition never modify data in a test operation to a device which performs a crucial operation to the system It may cause an accident by a false output or malfunction When monitoring with the system monitor function you can specify an optional station or device to be monitored and test it The operation of testing a bit device word device or special module buffer memory of the PLC CPU is explained in this section 9 6 1 Basic operation The operation procedure for testing when monitoring with the system monitor function is shown below Operation procedure When monitoring with the system monitor function display any monitor screen DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWKNo 0 STATION FF d When a screen other than the monitor screen is displayed display any monitor screen according to the explanatory section for each monitor function Ent When Device Monitor screen is displayed D 15 2147483648 DW D 10 32767 X 001 e 25 aks When you touch CANCEL the display moves returns
164. Speed Limit 9 01234567 01234567 2 012 012 ay Started H 1 TE 012 012 BUSY 012 012 M Code ON 012 012 EE In nosition 012 012 Excessive Err 012 012 dece 012 012 Err Man Pulse 012 012 Batt Err Hi 012 012 Merron W Hi 2 13 14 15 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal 1 The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is mu E displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 2 The set manual pulser run enabled disabled status is displayed 47 347 3 The data number during execution of current positioning is displayed 48 348 4 The remaining pointer value is displayed 39 339 5 The current value during execution of current positioning is displayed oe 6 The change value of the current value is displayed A D 9 PRESE 42 342 7912 7922 7 The zero address set value is displayed 7913 7923 8 The set value of the output speed is displayed 600 601 9 The set value of the speed limit is displayed 7874 7894 10 The change value of the speed change is displayed 40 340 11 The set value of the jog speed is displayed 44 344 12 The set value of the jog speed limit is displayed 7875 7895 13 The set value of the M code is displayed 0 M code not used 46 346 14 The error code is displayed when an error occurs 45 345 15 The starting data number of each point is dis
165. T Il local station 2 Key Functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the other station monitor screen Key Function Switches to the other station monitor screen Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 11 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 2 Display contents and keys functions other station communication status monitor This section describes the other station communications status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT Display example OK E 20 pera 30 3 ES 40 gj OK ES so i OK ES 60 i OK 0 i EE FE Jok F No Contents of Display 1 Station numbers are shown up to the maximum number of linked stations Any station in an abnormal condition is highlighted on screen Any station specified as a reserved station is treated as a station that stays in a normal condition 2 Key Functions The table below shows the
166. T OFF ON LANGUAGE O EINGLISH MICRO Baud rate 1800 9600 19200 MICRO COM FORM FORM 1 FORM 2 T lt SELECT CHANGE I pees HH HH HH ME a ed You can set the operating environment of the GOT such as the beep sound message display language and screen saver s idle time When using the A985GOT you can also make settings on the Human sensor 4 Running diagnostic checks on GOT hardware see Section 4 6 Betta ie a a Cita ac aa aaa aa aaa a ECE diuo EEEE HE HIE HE ee ee ee eect eee Rone ee ee eee ee eS Be vvv Vu vvv vu PV PV GRAPH IC FONTROM MEMCARD USERROM CHECK CHECK AREA COMM TOLICHSIW CHECK CHECK CHECK You can run diagnostic checks on the GOT hardware including the image check font check memory card check and so on b Other functions see Section 4 7 for details e Displaying data on available space in the GOT internal memory Adjusting the clock of the PLC CPU e Displaying the display area cleanup screen Changing security levels e Limiting access to the Utility Menu screen 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 1 3 2 Features of the ladder monitor function Installing the ladder monitor function operating system into the GOT built in memory using the drawing software enables ladder monitoring of the PLC CPU program as shown in a ladder diagram The features of the ladder
167. Te MON DEV MON BAT MON TE MON When END is selected in any window the system I I monitor ends and the display moves to the original screen where the system monitor function started END END DEVMON BATMON TC MON DEVMON BAT MON TC MON BM MON BM MON END Y v M DEV MON BAT MON TC MON BM MON Touch display position of monitor function to be selected Y v Y ToSec 9 2 ToSec 9 3 Sec 9 4 Sec 9 5 See Sec 9 1 for common operations y Execute operation for selected monitor function Display monitor screen of selected function SET The procedure for testing is as follows Set reset bit device TEST Change current values of word device Change current value set values of T or C To Sec 9 6 1 Touch the key where the touch switch expanded function was set with the drawing software and start the system monitor function When the Utility screen is displayed touch PLC MON to start the System monitor function 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Chapter9 Operation of the various system monitor screens This chapter contains an explanation of eac
168. Utility function s nuc q Extension function System monitor function O Ladder monitor function h O ay Special unit monitor function 9 ae Required Option iuneton Network monitor function o o List editor function ao J O O Applicable x Not applicable 2 Note that some functions are unavailable depending on the connection target CPU and connection form There are the following restrictions on each function depending on the connection target CPU and connection form Refer to Chapter 2 of the GOT A900 Series User s Manual SW4D5C GOTR PACKE compatible Connection System Manual for the connectable CPU names and the access range for monitoring per connection form POINTS 1 Ladder monitoring is not available for sub programs 2 and 3 of the A4UCPU when connected to the computer link 2 When the monitoring destination is QnACPU Q4ARCPU or Q2ASCPU the CPU that can perform setup value changes to the timer counter of the system monitor function and perform device comment displays is that the CPU which ahs 9707 B and later in the date column of the rated plate When changing the timer counter setup value Viewing the Rated Plate and performing the device comment display use the CPU that is described above 8 When the is connected to an AnNCPU or AnACPU the I O No to which a data link module or network module is installed cannot be displayed PROGRAMMBLE CONT
169. ZR X M Ww R D Ww 2147483648 DW 32767 e 43 68378428 0 0 When displaying the device monitor screen id The quick test is turned on by clicking on Status when the quick test function is on 9 19 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 2 Operation to turn off the quick test function When TEST is touched when the quick test function is on a dialog box is displayed When OK is touched the quick test be canceled 3 Bit device quick test Se When the device monitor screen is displayed DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET Touch the device name or device no display position for NETWK SSPAIONIEE the bit device to be SET RESET D 15 2147483648 DW ZR 1042431 32767 SPX 0001 M 25 200 43 R 50 68378428 DW D 0 0 100 0 The device name and device touched is displayed DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET re NETWK No 0 STATION FF highlighted QUICK TEST When the on off display O of the hihglihted display is D 15 2147483648 DW i pecus touched the status is SET RESET e When the current bit device is ON then it is turned OFF M 25 W 500 di RESET R 50 68378428 DW When OFF it will be SET 0 0 w 0 ses The on off display area of the X0001 device is DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET highli
170. a the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas on a detached island or remote place expenses to dispatch an engineer shall be charged for Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage state usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a user s device failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary
171. ackage the general description of various monitoring functions the procedure for displaying the monitor screen on the GOT and how to use the help function Found in the packing of the SW4D5C GOTR PACKE A9GT QBUSS Type Bus Connection Board User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of ASGT QBUSS IB 0800094 13 978 1B 0800073 13JQ7 with AJGT QBUSS 13JQ75 A9GT QBUS2S Type Multi Drop Bus Connection Board User s Manual IB 0800074 Describes specifications part names and installation of ASGT QBUS2S 13JQ7 with AJGT QBUS2S 13JQ76 A9GT QBUS2SU Type Multi Drop Bus connection unit User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of ASGT QBUS2SU with ASGT QBUS2SU IB 0800083 13083 A9GT BUSSU Type Bus connection unit User s Manual IB 0800076 Describes specifications part names and installation of ASGT BUSSU 13JQ78 with ASGT BUSSU 139078 A9GT BUS2SU Type Multi Drop Bus connection unit User s Manual IB 0800077 Describes specifications part names and installation of A9GT BUS2SU 13JQ79 with AYGT BUS2SU 194979 A9GT BUSS Type Bus Connection Board User s Manual Describes specifications part names and installation of A9GT BUSS IB 68953 13JM87 with AJGT BUSS A9GT BUS2S Type Multi Drop Bus Connection Board User s Manual IB 68954 Describes specifications part names and installation of A9GT BUS2S 13JM88 with AGT BUS2S A7GT BUSS
172. al 3 Positioning direction only valid in incremental mode 0 Forward direction address increase direction 1 Reverse direction address decrease direction 12 79 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 AD75 A1SD75 module monitor The contents displayed on each monitor of the AD75P1 P2 P3 module and the A1SD75P1 P2 module are nearly identical except for the sections displaying the module format The AD75P3 module monitor screen is used as an example in this section 12 23 1 l O monitor SET Data MONIT ADTSP 1 0 Monitar Screen RESET Chg Menu ENO A Y 00 Ready 0 0 Start Oe is l Started 1 1 oh z Mshxisss 7 3 3 Stop BUSY 4 4 F Manxise 5 5 1 15 6 6 FHD JOG Wisk Completed 17 7 isk 8 8 FAD 15 T 9 9 RVS 7 Asisti Error A FHD Axis e B B E iss Stop WAX is l M Code D D Ax isk for use isa F F MaNot for use The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 80 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 2 Operation monitor SET Data MONIT 5 Operation Monitar Screen RESET chg menu END Axis
173. an abnormal condition is highlighted on screen A station specified as a reserved station is treated as a station that stays in a normal condition 2 Key Functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the other station loop status monitor screen Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station loop status monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 17 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT MEMO 17 18 18 ERROR DISPLAYS AND COUNTERMEASURES WHEN MONITORING NETWORKS MELSEC GOT Chapter18 Error Displays and Countermeasures when Monitoring Networks The following chart shows the error messages that are displayed during the network monitor operation and how to handle them Error message Contents of error Action to take e Check the connections between A the PLC CPU and the GOT for Communicalioncorid not disconnected connectors and established with the PLC CPU cables e Check if an error has occurred in the PLC CPU Can not Communication The PLC CPU to be Key Word error connected is keyword Release the keyword protected by the QnA 18 1 MONITORING NETWORK 18 ERROR DISPLAYS AND COUNTERMEASURES WHEN MONITORING ORKS MELSEC GOT MEMO 18 2 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT Chapter19 Oper
174. and maintenance operations for the PLC system The features of each monitor function are explained in the following sections 1 3 1 Features of the utility function The utility function enables you to use GOT setup and self tests To use the utility function you need to install an operating system for the utility function on the GOT built in internal memory by using drawing software The features of the utility function are shown below 1 The brightness of a monitor screen can be adjusted see Section 4 3 for details ai gt PLC NET LIST LADDER SP HEMOR MON MON EDITOR MON UNIT INFO e elel el DATA TIME CLEAN PASS SELF UF SET HORD CHECK 2 The screen and OS data can be copied between the internal memory and memory card see Section 4 4 for details MONITOR IMMER MEMORY MEMORY CARD MONITOR INNER MEMORY lt MEMORY CARD 05 INNER MEMORY MEMORY CARD SEL J copy The data monitored can be copied to and from the GOT built in internal memory or a memory card installed on the GOT The OS data can only be copied from the GOT to the memory card 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 8 Setting a use environment of the GOT see Section 4 5 for details E es tent nd tentando nnn en EE MM Me eee enden c nr EEEE EEE rn dE BUZZER VOLUME NONE SHORT LONG OUTSIDE SPEAKER OFF ON SCREEN SAVE TIME O O MIN D FREE SCREEN SAVE LIGH
175. and the GOT amor established with the PLC CPU disconnected or cut cables e Has an error occurred in the PLC CPU 10 1 10 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SYSTEM MONITORING MELSEC GOT MEMO 11 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT Chapter11 Operation procedures for special module monitor function The operation procedure when using the special module monitor function is explained in this chapter 11 1 Operation procedures before starting special module monitoring This section contains a summary of the procedure for transmitting the system program OS for the special module monitor function and the special module monitor data from the personal computer to the GOT until it is installed in built in memory For details please refer to the Help in Drawing Software Details of the screen display and key operation are shown in the Help Start Connect GOT and personal computer Start up GOT It is not necessary to set up and operate the GOT after startup y Start up personal computer and start drawing software With the drawing software transmit the OS Transmit the data using the installation dialog box for the special module monitor function from the personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory Installation is complete When installation is finished Completed is displayed on the installation dialog box
176. art Error Start History RESET chg MENU Start Error History Start History Nn Rx Start Time Res No AX Start Mode Time Res 1 oO 0 12 00 00 00 00 012 1 0 0 000123 00 00 00 00 012 2 0 Dnp l23 00 00 00 00 012 2 0 0 000123 00 00 00 00 012 gu Dnp l23 00 00 00 00 012 3 0 0 000123 00 00 00 00 012 4 0 0 000125 00 00 00 00 012 4 do 0 pol23 00 00 00 00 012 5 n Dp lz3 00 00 00 00 12 5 0 0 000123 00 00 00 00 012 60 Dnp l23 00 00 00 00 012 60 0 000123 00 00 00 00 012 7a 01 p lz3 00 00 00 00 012 Tuo 01 1 00 00 00 00 012 80 0 0001295 00 00 00 00 012 60 0 pO123 00 00 00 00 012 3 n Dp lz3 00 00 00 00 12 30 0 000123 00 00 00 00 012 10 G 0 000125 00 00 00 00 012 10 0 000123 00 00 00 00 012 11 c 01 p lz3 00 00 00 00 012 11 01 1 00 00 00 00 012 12 0 0 0001295 00 00 00 00 012 12 0 000123 00 00 00 00 012 13 Dp l2z3 00 00 00 00 012 13 0 0 000123 00 00 00 00 012 14 0 Dp l23 00 00 00 00 012 14 0 000123 00 00 00 00 012 15 0 000125 00 00 00 00 012 15 0 0 0 01235 00 00 00 00 012 15 0 Dp lz3 00 00 00 00 012 16 0 000123 00 00 00 00 012 1 2 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The error startup history is displayed 543 to 622 Axis Startup axis no 543 548 Startup source Source which initiates startup 1 544 549 00 PLC CPU Y 01 External signal 10 Peripheral equipment AD75P Type of operation Type of oper
177. arted after the defect search is completed c Whether an A B contact is conductive or nonconductive may not match its screen display during and after the defect search This is because the monitoring is continued during the defect search d After the defect search is completed touching or will allow you to search from the ladder backward in the search results display mode Up to 100 ladders can be displayed on screen The following messages will appear at the start or the end of the search results When viewing the start of search results This is the start of search results e When viewing the end of the search results This is the end of search results The ON OFF display of contacts and coils on one screen is limited to 11 contacts per 1 coil per 1 ladder If there are several coils available the ON OFF display of coils appears on screen only for the device searched If the steps of search results are related to 100 ladders or more the ON OFF display does not appear on screen e Menu is replaced with Esc upon starting the defect search Touching Esc can exit the search results display mode Touching Esc again will replace it with Menu When returning to the ladder mode the last step of search results is displayed in the top of the screen f If on screen data exceeds one screenful of data it will be displayed across automatically scrolled screens g Touching Esc can stop the defect search
178. ategory of the own station Total of L Sta 2 D Link Info Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked The maximum number is defined by common parameters Com Status 3 Com Status Displays the communications status of the own station Parameter wait Cyclic comm NG e This shows the status of receiving Device BWY from the master station 4 omm OK Data is being received by cyclic receiving NG The own station cannot receive data because of column reading e This shows the status of receiving Device BW from the master BW From station of a dual layer system 5 H OK Data is being received by cyclic receiving ostmaster NG The own station cannot receive data due to column reading FLoop Shows the status of the primary loop lines of the own station Normal NG RLoop Shows the status of the secondary loop lines of the own station Normal NG 6 LoopBK Info 2 Key functions The table below shows the functions of keys that are used on the detailed own station monitor screen Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the detailed own station monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed Changes the details on the window only for A95 GOT 17 4 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 2 3 Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET 10 Control s
179. ation Procedures for the List editor function This section describes the operation procedures for use of list editor function 19 1 Operation procedures before starting the list edit Procedures for transferring the operating system OS for the list editor function from the personal computer to the GOT and for installing the system into the memory For details refer to the Help of the drawing software Detailed information including displays and key operations is provided Connect the GOT to the personal computer Statthe GOT Tq The GOT does not require setting and operation after start up y Start the personal computer and the drawing software Transfer the OS for the list editor function from the es Transfer the system in the installation dialog box personal computer to the GOT Install it into the memory e GOT eating heat After installation the GOT allows editing the list After installation the installation dialog box shows Completed Y End the drawing software Y End For list edit go to 19 2 19 1 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 19 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to starting list editing This section explains how you should operate the GOT to access the list editor function after having installed the list editor function operating system OS to the GOT internal memor
180. ation at startup 2 544 549 If restarting from a stopped status Re is displayed just before this Time Startup time hour minutes seconds 100 545 546 550 milliseconds 547 552 Judgment Error code when startup error occurred decimal The numeric values of the least significant 14 bits of the buffer memory are displayed The startup history is displayed 462 to 541 The contents of the display are the same as in 1 Axis Startup axis no 462 467 Startup source Source which initiates startup 1 463 468 Type of operation Type of operation at startup 2 463 468 Time Startup time hour minutes seconds 100 464 465 469 milliseconds 466 471 Judgment Error code when startup error occurred decimal 12 89 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 1 The display is based on the data in Bits 13 and 14 of the object buffer memory 2 The correspondence between the numeric value displayed in the Operation Type column and the type of startup is shown below The display is based on the data in Bits 0 to 12 of the object buffer memory Data no Type of startup Remarks Indicates the data number at the time of startup 1to 600 Startup with positioning operation 7000 Startup with block positioning operation 8051 Startup with origin point return 8052 Startup with high speed origin point return 8053 Startup with change in current value 816
181. by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found to not be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not possible after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi chance losses lost profits incurred to the user by failures in Mitsubishi products damages and secondary damages ca
182. by the same device is enabled by touching 2 on the screen If you touch any other key but 2 the continuous read function is canceled 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 8 When device search contact point search or coil search is performed during ladder monitoring only the ladder block which includes the read search device is displayed Example 1 When the device name to be searched is entered as X0001 Ladder monitor screen STEP 12345 18374 0002 Displayed in the top area 4HE ext picro mon we s 4 4 E 2 Print Cancel Screen print 2 When the same search is repeated Ladder monitor screen STEP 12345 18374 X0001 10 25 xo002 14 ixo001 X0002 7 00 5 Displayedon fhe nextiine P Y0040 J maa Print Cancel Screen Print 4 Please note that the indirect specification device index register z cannot be specified and read while the MELSEC QnA ladder monitor is executed 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 1 3 Using the defect search The defect search enables you to examine an ladder block that caused a failure It helps you to search from the ladder block backward so that you can determine why any coil was turned ON or OFF during the ladder monitoring or whether its contact is conductive
183. ce number used in the latch relay step relay internal relay Set the top device used in the low speed high speed retentive timers Set the number of timers used the top device number that stores the setting value after T256 and the top device used in the low speed high speed retentive timers Set the number of counters used and the top device number that stores the setting value after C255 Set the range of the device for latch setting Set the value of the watchdog timer in the unit of 10 ms Set the I O control system When parameter setting is complete write the PLC CPU MELSEC GOT PARAM GO END gt 1 fs uns GO PARAM CLEAR END gt Setting for multiple items is also available Capacity GO END gt 2 IF gt End of writing is displayed For main input unit 1K step Ly Capacity gt END gt 2 For sub input unit 1K step points gt END gt 2 file register input unit 1K point Top number of L gt Top number of L gt Top number of Top number of timer No of timer
184. change has been made to the Setup settings touching resets and restarts the GOT The display returns to the utility menu or monitor screen 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 6 Running diagnostic checks on GOT hardware self test 1 Display screen E E E AEAEE A EHE AAEE EEEE CI possess Me SUR SN S SO SIE SSD eer He GRAPH IG FONTROM HE HCARD 5 CHECK CHECK CHECK CHECK 08 Ll OS AREA TOUCHSNW CHECK CHECK CHECK 2 Features Diagnostic checks on GOT hardware include the following options Graphic Check 8 Allows you to perform visual inspection on screen display for discoloration and lack of display Fontrom Check Allows you to perform visual inspection for deformation in font size e Memcard Check Allows you to make a check on the hardware of a memory card After checking a memory card are initialized e Userrom Check Allows you to check for user space The in the internal memory After GOT checking user space is cleared to performs delete any data contained in the these user space racks OS Area Check verer Allows you to check for OS space in the internal memory Comm Check 9 Allows you to check for GOT to PLC CPU communications Touchsw Check mn Allows you to check for touch keys 3 Procedure a Basic operation Select the desired butto
185. ction of the keys that are used with the operation of the TC Monitor screen Function Move to basic screen function change menu screen for changing to another monitor function or ending the system monitor See Sec 9 1 1 Move to display change menu screen for changing the numerical display on the TC monitor screen decimal hexadecimal or changing the comment display on off See Sec 9 1 2 Move to device setting menu screen to change the monitor device or execute a test Change of monitor device See Sec 9 1 3 Test See Sec 9 6 vj A Scroll the display contents up or down one line to display the monitor device that is not displayed just before or after the current display Operation is enabled when monitor device comment is displayed Scrolls down one line Scrolls up one line 9 13 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 5 BM Monitor monitor of buffer memory When monitoring the function that monitors the buffer memory of the special function module is called the BM monitor The BM monitor screen when executing the system monitor is explained below 9 5 1 Basic operation The BM Monitor operation procedure is shown below See Sec 9 1 1 Operation procedure nds When a screen other than the basic screen is displayed touch MENU at the top of the currently displayed screen display the basic screen and sel
186. d device Delete program Deletes a program at the specified step Specified block Deletes the specified block in the program Delete D Delete All NOPs Deletes all NOP instructions found in program codes described before the END instruction NOPLF instructions will not be deleted Comment display Displays a comment for the specified device Clear all parameters Clears all parameters in the ACPU only Parameter Sets or changes various parameters like those for the memory P Set parameter capacity timer counter and latching range Displays a list of instructions that start with the specified character and allows the user to choose from them Sets or changes a keyword 3 17 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT Mode Function Action mode display Change T C set values Changes values set totimer counterdevices values set to timer counter devices Displays details of an error in the ACPU and the associated step Read erroneous step number Checks duplex coils instruction codes and other elements in the Program check program Buffer memory batch With regard to a special function unit of the specified I O number Monitor onok monitors the contents of the buffer memory at the specified address nm Others O PC system Clock monitor monitor Monitors the ACPU clock D9025 through D9027 Clears all contents of the ACPU memory and resets it to the initial Monitor PC memory siate All Clear
187. d with the specified device used in the program Read the command with the specified device Read operation above Step number 4 SP 4 vi Display the program with automatic scroll Automatic scroll 20 3 4 Operation in Insert mode 1 Procedures key input sequence INSERT Step number gt Insert a command in the Insert a command in the program program Display the program gt HELP Specify the movement in the Insert mode start step Move the program Move the whole program 80 Specify the movement Specify the movement GO end step destination step Display the program HELP Specify the in the Insert mode start step Copy the program Copy the program E GO Specify the 60 gt Specify the copy GO copy end step destination step 20 3 5 Operation in Delete D mode Procedures key input sequence DELETE Step number Delete a command from the Delete a command from program the program Display the program HELP Spec
188. ding block type special function module If there is no small building block type special function module special is displayed and the object module cannot be monitored Example Module Model Model Name Displayed AD72 gt A1SD71 AJ71ID A1SJ71ID AJ71PT32 S8 _ A1SJ71PT32 S3 AD75P A1SD75P A68AND A1S64AD A68RD A1S62RD 3 Monitoring restricted special function modules a When monitoring the AD71 S1 S2 S7 When the slot on front of the AD71 module is an empty slot monitoring is done in the following way 1 The AD71 is treated as the AD72 and AD72 is displayed on the system configuration screen In this case when monitoring the AD71 select the AD72 in the object display position 2 The monitor screen that is displayed by 1 above is for the AD72 The number obtained by subtracting 10H from the I O signal number on the display is the number to be used when installing the AD71 in the O slot If you do not want the AD1 to be treated as the AD72 execute Shift the installation position of AD71 forward or In the I O assignments assign the empty slot in front of AD71 to the 16 X Y points b When monitoring the A68AD installed in the small building block type PLC CPU With the GOT the A68AD that is installed in the expansion base unit for the building block type setup connected to the small bu
189. display The set manual pulser run enabled disabled status is displayed 47 347 The set value of the M code is displayed 46 346 The set value of the comment for the M code is displayed 49 to 200 349 to 500 The data number during execution of current positioning is displayed 48 348 The remaining pointer value is displayed 39 339 The error code is displayed when an error occurs 45 345 The 8 bits where the status is saved are displayed in hexadecimal format When FF is displayed b15 1 display conditions 0 display conditions Battery alarm Zero return request During dwell time During positioning busy status except for zero return jog run manual pulser run Zero return complete Near signal on Drive module ready signal on Stop signal from drive module on Not condition at left 12 77 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 22 5 I O monitor SET Data MONIT ADT2 A1SD71 Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che menu END Inputs x M HDT Error uH x In position po HH X Posit Start 1 READY Y In position 1 11 Y Posit Start 2 gx Pos Complet X Excessive Errpe 12 Interpolation 3 Y Pos bompleteE Y Excessive Erroa 13 g 4 zero Start 4 x Axis BUSY 4 14 Y zero Start 5 Y Axis BUSY 5 15 X Stop 1 X Zero Request P6 6 16 Y Stop 7 Y zero Request 7 il x Fud J
190. e MONITOR Program 2164 1989 06 10 12 43 Monito KUMITATE Comment 2184 11 HANSOU Comment 2184 19 MONITOR Comment 10897 19 Comment DISPLAY USE OF EXISTING DATA SELECT USE OR CLEAR CLEAR EXISTING DATA USE OF EXISTING DATA STARTING LADDER MON DISPLAY USE OF EXISTING DATA E SELECT USE OR CLERR MEMORY 1 button After the setting is over touch the STARTING LADDER DISPLAY USE OF EXISTING DATA SELECT USE OR CLEAR 5 Then touch the Drive key to select the drive applicable memory which stores the applicable ladder data to be monitored Size Date Time Title eC oe T es CCE 10 Program No 10 KAKOU Program 37 A Line KUMITATE Program 06 10 17 37 B Line HANSOU Program 1999 06 10 17 40 Line KENSA Program 1999 06 10 17 42 D Line MONITOR Program 1999 06 10 17 43 Monitor System KUMITATE Comment 1999 06 10 17 45 A Line HANSOU Comment 1999 06 10 07 21 B Line MONITOR Comment 1999 06 10 17 50 Monitor Sustem KENSA Comment 1999 06 10 13 02 C Line To the following page 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT From the previous page 6 The Drive Selection Window is displayed Select the drive DRIVE 0 i j PEELE RAM dea MER Gard applicable memory with the following keys 0 jto 4
191. e Clock Clock 1 Display screen Sample screen 44 09 99 17 37 57 THU DD MM YY T CHANGE lt lt SELECT e SET The time when the Clock Settings screen was displayed is shown in the window panel The time indicator in the upper right corner of the screen shows the current time After correcting the date or time check the clock for the current time 2 Features The date time and a day of the week can be set to adjust the clock of the PLC CPU and the A9GT RS2T 3 Procedure a Basic operation e Touch gt to select the desired option e Touch to change numeric values e Touch 10 or 10 to change the numerical values in increments of 10 Touch to set the clock of the PLC CPU b To return to the Utility Menu screen e Touch to return to the Utility Menu screen POINTS e Adjust the clock when you start up the system The clock cannot be properly adjusted while reading or writing clock data by running sequence programs on the PLC CPU side or when M9028 is turned on by sequence programs in the case of the ACPU This option is not selectable from the Utility Menu screen when connected to the PLC CPU that has no clock function e This option is not selectable when the A9GT RS2 is used for microcomputer connection 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 9 Displaying the display area cleanup screen screen clea
192. e GOT A900 Series User s manual SW4D5C GOTR PACKE compatible Connection system manual When the capacity of parameter PLC program TC setting value comment and extension comment is 144 kbytes or more the comment will not be properly displayed The local device cannot be monitored on the QnACPU 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 2 System monitor function specifications 3 2 1 PLC CPUs to be monitored The PLC CPUS that allow system monitoring are the QCPU QnACPU ACPU FXCPU and motion controller CPU For details refer to Section 1 2 2 3 2 2 Access ranges to be monitored For access range for the system monitor function see GOT A900 Series User s manual SW4D5C GOTR PACKE compatible Connection system manual 3 2 3 Names of devices to be monitored For the names of devices that can be monitored with the system monitor function see GOT A900 Series User s manual SW4D5C GOTR PACKE compatible Connection system manual 3 2 4 Precautions when using the system monitor function The precautions to follow when using the system monitor function are shown below 1 Monitor and test of real number data Real number data cannot be monitored or tested Monitoring of word devices that save real number data is all done by integer data binary data 2 Monitoring in 32 bit modules When monitoring word devices such as T C D W in 32 bit 2 word modules monitor up to the point where 32 bits remain in the monitor proc
193. e chart be low shows the functions of the keys that are used with the Entry Monitor screen operation Key Function Move to basic screen function change menu screen to change to another monitor function or ending the system monitor See Sec 9 1 1 Move to the display change menu screen to change the numerical display on the Entry Monitor screen decimal hexadecimal or changing the comment display on off See Sec 9 1 2 Move to device setting menu screen to enter the monitor device delete the device or execute a test Entry of monitor device See Sec 9 1 3 Deletion of entry device See Sec 9 2 3 Test See Sec 9 6 Scroll the display up or down one line and display the monitor device that is not displayed just before or after the current display When five or more monitor devices are entered operation is enabled when the monitor device comment is displayed y A Scrolls down one line Scrolls up one line 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 2 3 Deleting a registered device The operation of deleting erasing the entry of the device being monitored with the Entry Monitor screen is explained below The following two methods can be used to delete the registered device e Random deletion Deletes only one specified device e Batch deletion Deletes all devices that are currently registered
194. e set status of the regeneration resistance is displayed 0 None 1 RB30 2 50 51 3 RB100 101 6 11 The set status of the motor type is displayed 0 Standard 1 LowinertiaL 2 Flat U The set value of the velocity integration is displayed 13 The set value of the in position range is displayed The set status of the direction of rotation is displayed 15 0 Counter clockwise with address increase 1 Clockwise with address increase The set value of the torque limit is displayed 1 17 The set value of the velocity limit is displayed 40 41 6 7 8 9 0 The feedback pulse number PLS of one revolution of the motor is displayed 12 65 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Contents of displ CENMM NNNM to reference S 18 The set value of the acceleration time is displayed E The set value of the deceleration time is displayed 20 The set status of the positioning mode is displayed 44 0 Positioning mode 1 Velocity position control change mode The servo amp model code and version are displayed 114to 117 Valid when using peripheral instrument SW GP AD70DP Bt y 2 j t Servo Test mode ready OFF normal Test mode 1 SONG request ready ON error The set status of the AD70D slide switch is displayed sk Sws SW7 SWe SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 Swi OFF OFF OFF OFF
195. e specified memory as is directly as is Use the 1 10th of the data Write the value to be specified as read as actual value 10 times the value When 0 When 1 The measured temperature PV value detected for each channel is displayed In the decimal point position 0 column the value of the detected measured temperature is displayed as is In the decimal point position 1 column the value 1 10th of the detected measured temperature is displayed The goal value SV value set for each channel is displayed In the decimal point position 0 column the value of the set goal value is displayed as is In the decimal point position 1 column the 1 10th of the set goal value is displayed The PID calculated values 5 096to 105 0 of the temperature values read from the thermocouple of each is displayed in the graph A I is displayed when a warning is indicated in each channel The details of the warning can be verified in the warning occurrence details monitor screen A II is displayed when out of range data is stored in the temperature adjustment module buffer memory 12 111 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 27 2 Alert detail monitor SETZ Data MONIT END ALS64TCTT RT S1 Alert details RESET Chg MENU CH2 CH3 CH4 PV exceeds the specified temperature measurement range in the input range E O Hm PV is belou t
196. e temperature detection value of each channel is displayed up to 1 digit after the decimal point The temperature detection value of each channel is displayed up to 3 digits after the decimal point The values set for the time and count of times for averaging processing of each of the channels is displayed The specified conversion enabled disabled status of each channel is displayed The Conversion Completed flag status for each channel is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing sampling processing of each channel is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing of each channel is displayed A I is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs W is displayed when a writing data error occurs the channel where it occurred and error code are displayed The specified status of the platinum temperature sensor that is used is displayed For A1S62RD3 A F is displayed a channel where broken wire was detected For A1S62RD4 A II is displayed in CH1 when a broken wire is detected in any channel 10 11 18 to 21 2 3 12 18 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 8 2 I O monitor Data MONIT BlS62RD Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Chg menu ENO Inputs X Qutputs Y Error 10 0 0 1 EM READY 11 1 Mj Error Detection 12 2 Error Reset We CH1 Disconnected
197. e the memory cassette with a new one mounted The set step number is larger than the Step over error Set the correct step number maximum step number Setting error Setting value is not correct Set the correct value The function which cannot be executed was Not selectable selected e Select other function The set device symbol is incorrect Perform the correct key operation The specified command was not found Set the correct device symbol The device number exceeds the range Set the number within the range of CPU device Proceed to the next operation if it does not affect the control Correct the program if it affects the control e When the CPU has detected the error stop running of the operation After resetting the When the program is read it cannot be g g Command error CPU check the command around the error converted to the proper command Write the correct command For check of the error step refer to 20 3 7 The command set at the time of read write Command setting error Set the correct command or insert is not correct When writing in the Write or the Memory protect Insert Delete mode the memory protect Switch in the memory cassette is ON Memory cassette check The identical coil is found in the sequence program Identical coil Turn OFF the memory protect switch in the memory cassette Memory assignment set in the parame
198. ea provided by the List editor function Current mode display ERZNNXEETUTIZNNEEEEDES Valid key display RULES Step number device name and number Program list etc The 4th line displays data program name device name etc entered by the user 1 Mode and valid key display The following describes the mode and valid key display The mode display shows the list editor function mode selected by the user The valid key display shows which of the two functions assigned to each key is currently available the function indicated at the upper part of the key or the function indicated at the lower part of the key Current mode display Display Mode Hunnis dd Read mode Write mode Insert mode Delete mode Pes seen eres Parameter mode o Other mode Valid key display This display is not always available With regard to keys framed in dotted lines in the figure shown at the left the valid key display indicates which of the two functions assigned to each key is valid a SHIFT HELP T ORTE 5 e 4 2 Function indicated at the upper part of each key is available TO D NG y Function indicated at the lower part of each key is available C D FROM CALL RET DEC Example FROM key H J K 0 gt ww G L ui MOV gt lt i Me Function indicated at t
199. ect BM Monitor n When you touch MENU you return to the basic screen When you touch FORM you can change this display See Sec 9 1 2 When you touch SET the monitor station and device PRESS SET KEY SELECT can be specified See Sec 9 1 3 ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp NO Specify the initial monitor device Specify the station and device to be monitored and the monitor module 16 32 bit module Select BM Monitor with the basic screen NETWK No 0 STATION FF pel cael complete display the BM For the method of the specifying see Sec 9 1 3 Specify the module to be monitored the buffer memory as follows Initial Y NETWK No 0 STATION FF 1 Specify the initial address BM 1110 32768 BM 1118 0 of the buffer memory in BM 1111 64 BM 1119 0 decimal BM 1112 149 BM 1120 150 BM 1113 1111 1121 131 m BM 1114 126 BM 1122 32768 When the initial I O signal of BM 1115 160 BM 1123 555 BM 1116 B55 BM A494 2308 module is displayed with three BM 1117 1200 BM 1125 11000 digits specify the first two digits SN Switching between decimal and hexadecimal display is enabled Do this as needed For the display change method see Sec 9 1 2 9 14 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 5 2 BM Monitor screen display and key functions In
200. ed 0 to The standard heater current values set for each channel are displayed The upper lower limits for when the movement value MV which are calculated with the PID calculation set for each channel is outputted to the external device are displayed A I is displayed when a warning occurs for each channel 12 114 13 OPERATING I O MODULE MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Chapter13 Operating I O module monitor screens This section explains how the various screens are operated in the special module monitor function when monitoring input or output modules 13 1 Specifying the module to be monitored This describes how to start monitoring an optional special input or output module Operation procedure Display the System Configuration screen See Sec 12 1 1 Specify the module to be monitored Touch the position at which the module is displayed 1 Of the modules installed in Slot 0 to Slot 7 of the base unit specify a module for which Input or Output is displayed For information on specifying special function modules please see Sec 12 1 3 Display the monitor screen for the specified module 2 For information on confirming the displayed contents and subsequent operation please see Sec 13 2 MODULE Tests cannot be conducted on input or output modules EN x eeeooo eeeocooso eeeocoooeeeeoooo o mo o8 2os3s028828 eeeoooeeeeocooso
201. ed YRS TTE ML to oP ek ot et it ate fel nes bs RAPERE Pulse 2 1 to 65535 01234 01234 01234 Revolution PLS i RM AE M 2107 1 7 ravel Per to 65535 x10 5 inch 3 Come Dx10 5 degree 01234 o 01284 01234 e bert Bd os BESTIA rat 4 Unit is 0123 0123 0123 Multiplier 100 x100 1000 x1000 KM Pulse Output PLS SIBN Mode 5 1 CH CCM 0 0 Mode 2 A B Mode Rotation O Forward Pulses 6 Rotation 0 0 0 Direction 1 Reverse Pulses Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal Axis 3 The command module for positioning control is displayed The pulse number per 1 revolution of the motor determined by the machine system is displayed The travel distance per 1 revolution of the motor determined by the machine system is displayed The multiplier of the travel distance per 1 pulse is displayed The pulse output mode is displayed 12 82 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 2 Basic parameter 2 SET Data MONIT aADTSP Basic Parameter 2 RESET Che menu ENO Parameter Valid Range 1 15 2 15 15 o 600000000 410 5 mm min 1 to 600000000 x10 3 inch min o 600000000 012345678 012345678 012345675 410 3 deg minl 0 to 1000000 PLS sec 1 Speed Limit 2 Rccel Time 0 to 6
202. ed during RUN status it returns to the output values and output status from the sequence program Operation procedure Display monitor screen SET Data MONIT 071 Parameter Data Monitor Screen RESET Chg menu END jovmds x CDDEFF pee 0110110110110110 Posit Stant IPavel Pulse 01234567 InterpolationInching Trav 10123456789 456789 Y RBCDDEFF Posit Compl bm 0110110110110110 peed Limit 01234567 Zero Request Spd Limit 01234567 A Pulse D P Mode Zero Start 0 B Type Zero Completeficc I 1 A Type B M Code Timing Fud Jog Start 0 WITH Mode Rev Jog Start 1 RFTER Mode 123456783 Code ON OFF 123456789 0 OFF 1 FF Unit Setting 00 mn 01 inch 10 deg 11 PLS Data SET Chg REsET 79080 12 5 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT When eus is touched changes current value of buffer Display key window on monitor screen as LETTERS RONT eno All of the following operations can be carried out by touching i june the keys in the displayed key window _ e When you touch at the upper left of the key window the key window closes and the display returns to the monitor 6 screen on 1 Move the cursor to the position where the data to be tested 1 disconn 5 disconn
203. ed in one window see Section 9 5 e With the GOT the full screen can be divided into four windows and separate monitoring carried out in all four windows simultaneously DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET BATCH MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWKNo 0 STATION FF No STATION FF TU 32767 T8 500 D 15 2147483648 DW D o 32767 19 3234 x 0 25 Y 7 w 200 43 50 68378428 DW 300 30000 21 22 0 23 32768 0 looooooocg 25 0 TCMONTOR TEST MENU FORM SET No 0 STATION FF T om o FOTA Production ine A T 0 sv 0 1b OH BM 1112 149 BM 1120 150 Production ine BM 1113 BM 121 131 T SV 150 94 BM 1114 126 BM 1122 32768 Production ine 3 MONITOR TEST MENUJFORM SET Noj 0 STATION FF VO NO 1 BM 1110 32767 BM 1118 0 64 BM 1115 160 BM 1128 555 104 BM 1116 255 BM 1124 2368 Production line D BM 1117 1200 BM 1125 11000 1 10 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 2 Data can be changed by test operation see Section 9 6 for details Test sample When is on When changing DO present value NETWKNo 0 STATIONI FF
204. eed for connection with the QC24N Factory set to 19200bps e Baud rate Set the transmission speed for connection with the Yaskawa PLC or SIEMENS PLC Factory set to 19200bps e Adapter address Specify the MPI address on PROFIBUS assigned to the HMI adapter connected to the GOT for SIEMENS PLC connection Factory set to 1 e Host FF address Specify the MPI address on PROFIBUS assigned to the PLC CPU to which the HMI adaptor is connected for SIEMENS PLC connection The specified PLC CPU is the host when monitor device setting is made on the drawing software For details of monitor device setting refer to the help function of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE Factory set to 2 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT e Screen save Human sensor You can select whether the screen saver is deactivated or not when the Human sensor has detected a man s motion Available for the A985GOT only factory set to Invalid e Human sensor detection sensitivity You can select the detection sensitivity of the Human sensor in any of 11 steps levels 0 to 10 sothat the sensor will not detect a motion such as a man passing before the GOT Available for the A985GOT only factory set to 10 Detection sensitivity setting 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Monitor time sec 0 0 1 0 2 0 4 0 8 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 4 e Human sensor OFF delay The Human sensor can be turned off when it does not detect a man s motion after it has turned on You can set that period between 00 min
205. een operation when using the special module monitor function is explained in this chapter 12 1 Screen configuration common operation and changing screens when monitoring The screen configuration and common operations used when executing the special module monitor are explained in this section 12 1 1 Composition of system configuration screen and key functions This section describes the structure of the system configuration screen that is displa displa yed after starting the special module monitor function and the key functions yed on the screen 1 Display Ext 1 The module format and related data are ri cpu 68RD A68ADN i readout from the PLC CPU por Ge OS executes it automatically E Ta REE FUP When connected to MELSECNET the M i screen shown in Section 12 1 3 is LN E Mm X Y150 X Y180 X Y1C0 Ext 2 displayed A616AD A616TD 71 200 X Y260 Nn d Displays network No and station No of monitor station With the module installed in the monitor station the special function module displays the format and the initial no of the I O signal with the sequencer CPU the I O module displays Input Output and the I O points For a special function module that cannot be monitored Special and the initial no of the I O signal are displayed The display position of the module is the key for moving the special function m
206. eference decimal Contents of display The current input value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital input value of channels 1 and 2 is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 1 is displayed for Output Over when an input value of 4001 or greater was set for channel 1 or 2 1 is displayed for Output Under when a negative number was set The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 13 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 5 2 Graph monitor SETY Data MONIT amp 62D8 S1 Graph Monitor Screen RESET Chg ENO Under Over Output Errar Erra 0 25 50 15 100 Channel 1 2 1 Channel 2 a 3 B oor Error 4 Buffer memory address No f 2 ponents Or display to reference decimal The current input value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital input value of channels 1 and 2 is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 A E is displayed in the Over Error column when an input value of 4001 or greater was set for channel 1 or 2 A is displayed in the Under Error column when an input value consisting of a negative number was set for channel 1 or 2 A is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs 12 14 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 6 A18
207. ensation amount when the positioning direction changes is displayed The upper limit of the range that the machine can travel is displayed Software stroke upper limit The lower limit of the range that the machine can travel is displayed Software stroke lower limit This shows whether the software stroke limit is applied to the feed current value or the feed machine value Check the feed current value with the operation monitor Sec 12 23 1 Check the feed machine value with the target value and the machine value monitor Sec 12 23 13 This shows whether the software stroke limit for the jog operation and the manual pulser operation is enabled disabled The torque limit is displayed 12 84 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 2 Extended parameter 2 SET Data MONIT Extended Parameter 2 REsET Che END Parameter Valid Range 151 fixise Axis Accel Time 1 to 65535 012345 012845 i 012345 parc p IM a ar E RAE E EER 1 Accel Time 2 to 65595 012345 012945 012345 Mt c LM SEE M Accel Time 3 to 65535 012345 012345 012345 ee Ser a Met Decel Time 1 1 to 65535 012345 i 012345 012345 UE M prn RON COURT EE D TEC PES 2 Decel Times2 1 to 65535 012345 012345 i 012345 PRENNE SEI scr Mr CERE Decel T
208. equired equipment for using the monitor functions in this manual are described in this section 2 1 Required equipment The chart below shows the equipment required for using the monitor functions Required equipment Application GOT main unit A95 GOT e t is required to use the option function BD M3 installed on the A95 GOT Required for installing the object monitor function OS into the GOT and downloading the special module monitor data It is necessary to install the drawing software into the PLC Required for connecting the above PLC and the GOT when installing the object monitor function OS into the GOT and downloading the special module monitor data PLC drawing software 2 Connecting cables Memory t is required to use the option function board 1 installed on the A985 97 960GOT Required Not required Special function module monitor Network monitor Ladder monitor System monitor 1 The table below shows the types of memory boards available for using the option functions Memory board for option functions A9GT FNB A9GT QFNB A9GT FNB1M A9GT FNB2M Expanded memory board for option functions A9GT FNBAM A9GT FNB8M For option function applicable for A FX ladder monitor For option function applicable for QnA A FX ladder monitor Option function applicable for A FX ladder monitor internal memory extension 1MB Option function a
209. er memory address to The connect number of the monitor being used is displayed The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output value of each channel is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from 180 to 1FF 0 to 100 When the A60MXT is used the temperature detection value of each channel is displayed A E is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs A I is displayed when an error occurs When the A60MXT is used 1 is displayed when a temperature was input that exceeds the temperature range set according to the digital output value set for each channel When the A60MXT is used 1 is displayed when a temperature was input that exceeds the measurement temperature range set for the measurement range of each channel The set status of the data format for each channel is displayed 200 to 27F The specified conversion enabled disabled status for each channel is 1010 17 displayed 12 56 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 19 AD70 A1SD70 module monitor The contents displayed on each monitor of the AD70 module and A1SD70 module are nearly identical except for the sections displaying the module format The AD70 module monitor screen is used as an example in each of the following sections 12 19 1 Positioning and parameter data monitor SET Data MONIT AD O Positioning amp Paramete
210. ere the input information could not be read out within a given time period If the automatic recovery function is on a 0 is displayed when the station is able to read the input normally Contents of display 70 to 77 195 90 to 93 12 100 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 24 3 Monitoring batch refreshing SET Data MONIT 1 2 53 Batch Refresh Data Monitor Screen RESET Che END Station Transmission Pata Receive Data __ ___ Number 16549210165432101654921016543210 1654321016543210 1694321076543210 4 1 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110 10110110110110110110 8 5 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110110110110110110110110 12 9 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110110110110110110110110 16 13 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110110110110110110110110 20 17 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110110110110110110110110 24 21 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110110110110110110110110 28 25 01101101201101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 32 29 01101101101101101101101101101101 01101101101101101101101101101101 86 33 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110110110110110110110110 40 37 01101101101101101101101101101101 0110110110110110110110110110110 44 41 011011011
211. ered To correct the password entered touch DEL to delete wrong characters and enter correct characters again b To quit entering a password to return to the previous monitor screen e Touch 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 11 Controlling limited access to the utility menu password 1 Screen display MEE a 15 126 ILe L v 1 TES TEETER PEI le 2 Features Password protection can be set on the by using drawing software If access to the Utility Menu screen is password protected a screen asking you to enter a password is displayed when you touch the upper right and left corners of the screen or when you touch a touch key on the screen A dialog box for defining a password is contained in the common settings menu of drawing software If the characters entered match a password the Utility Menu screen appears e f the characters entered do not match a password an error message appears on screen Touching EXIT will return to the previous monitor screen e Numerical numbers and alphabets A F can be used for a password 3 Procedure a To enter a password follow these steps e Touch 0 to 9 and to F to enter a password e Touch to confirm the password entered To correct the password entered touch DEL to delete wrong characters and then enter correct characters again b To quit
212. ering monitor devices Batch of n points of current Section monitor alues subsequent to specified 93 deis Monitoring of m points of current values set values contact points Section Aj 2 monitor and coils subsequent to specified 9 4 device Monitoring of x points of current values subsequent to specified Section 2 42 BMimonitar buffer memory of specified special 9 5 A A module Setting resetting of bit device of current value for A A memory of word device Cors of current value for T C ERN can be used while monitoring T C Changing of set value for T C can Az 2 be used while monitoring T C x x A Changing of device values using Section Quick test a test 9 6 2 Device comment Device comment display 3 ep _ Display Decimal and hexadecimal display Section switching of word device values and buffer 9 1 2 memory values Special module Monitoring of buffer memory of Ch 11 A monitor function Special module on special screen Network monitor Monitoring of network status of Ch 15 E function MELSECNET B Il or 10 1 3 Sequence program in the ACPU is A List editor function list edited Ch 19 x x 1 Subprograms 2 and 3 are not possible 2 Can be monitored only when the A8GT J61BT13 is used in the intelligent device station 8 When the A8GT J61BT15 is used in the remote device station only the link devices assigned to the GOT can be monitored 4 The T C
213. ering monitor devices E 2 Batch of n points of current Section monitor alues subsequent to specified 93 deis Monitoring of m points of current T C monitor Values Set values contact points PM and coils subsequent to specified device Monitoring of x points of current values subsequent to specified buffer memory of specified special A Setting resetting of bit device of current value for Data memory of word device editing Coro of current value for Section using test can be used while monitoring 9 6 operation T C be used while monitoring 15 isse of device values using Section Cee comment Device comment display Display Decimal and hexadecimal display M Switching word device values and buffer memory values Special module Monitoring of buffer memory of Ch 11 A A monitor function Special module on special screen Network monitor Monitoring of network status of Ch 15 A a function MELSECNET B Il or 10 List editor function Sequence program in the ACPU is Ch 19 x MMC list edited 1 Subprograms 2 and 3 are not possible 2 Can be monitored only when the A8GT J61BT13 is used in the intelligent device station 8 When the A8GT J61BT15 is used in the remote device station only the link devices assigned to the can be monitored 4 Can t monitor T C set values 5 Can t change V or Z current values 6 If you modified the set value for T C using t
214. es 11 Speed changes and positioning continues 2 Positioning method 0 Absolute 1 Incremental 3 Positioning direction only valid in incremental mode 0 Forward direction address increase direction 1 Reverse direction address decrease direction 12 73 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 22 AD72 A1SD71 module monitor The contents displayed on each monitor of the AD72 module and the A1SD71 module are nearly identical except for the sections displaying the module format The AD72 module monitor screen is used as an example in each of the following sections 12 22 1 Positioning monitor SET Data MONIT ADT2 A1SD71 Positioning Data Monitor Screen RESET Che END Xov Uus ES axis 2 i v axis X Y sicubi pate cate bees eae 01 012 012 Posit Start Exec Data No 012 Pt O1 012 Pt 01 02 012 012 Interpolat Lonk M seam Er Cc EE 03 012 012 Pasit Compl S Present value 0123456789 0123456789 04 012 012 SEEK PUR RE SRA SSS 05 012 012 1 Zero Request Change Value 0123456789 0123456789 06 012 012 E EE 07 012 012 Mill zero Complete zera Address 0123456789 0123456789 08 012 012 Fud Jog Start EE OEC 09 012 012 Jog Start Output Speed 8 0 234567 01234567 0 012 012 Stop 11 012 012
215. essing A location where 16 bits 1 word remain cannot be monitored This situation occurs when an odd number has been specified as the initial number in the monitor device Example When monitoring the A2NCPU data register in 32 bit modules beginning with an odd number D1 1017 1018 1019 1020 1021 1022 1023 v Monitor display module Nothing displayed 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 The Date column of a Rated Plate shows the date manufactured and function version number If it reads 9707 B or a later notation timer counter settings can be changed and device comments can be displayed when using any of the large scale QnACPUS or small scale QnACPUs When changing the timer counter setup value and performing the device comment display use the CPU that is described above Viewing the Rated Plate MELSEC PROGRAMMBLE CONTROLLER DATE 9707 B N Date of Function manufacture version 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 3 Special module monitor function specifications POINTS e The memory board is required to use the special unit monitor function on the A985 97 960GOT The special unit monitor function cannot be used on the A95 GOT 3 3 1 Access ranges to be monitored 1 When using bus connection CPU direct connection computer link connection The special function modules on the bases of the connected station and other stations can be monitored 2 When usi
216. f 16 32 bits is displayed as a percent such as with an A D conversion module specify the change value corresponding to the percentage in decimal Example When the set value of the offset or gain is 0 to 2000 when specifying a change value of 50 input 1000 3 For data where 16 bits is displayed one bit at a time as 0 and 1 specify the change value of 16 bits in decimal 12 6 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 1 6 Changing the screen monitor screen is displayed Start User created monitor screen Utility screen SP UNIT Touch END System Configuration screen See Sec 12 1 1 Touch Touch on display module Sys conf When I O module is selected 1 When special function module is selected Touch on monitor menu Monitor menu display screen for specified module MELSEC GOT This section describes how to change the screen when executing each monitor function of the special module monitor function from the status where the user created 1 Touch the key where the touch switch expanded function was set with the drawing software and start the special module monitor operation When the Utility screen is displayed touch SP UNIT and start the special module monitor function The system monitor function and special module monitor function can also be started from the Utility menu screen Key windo
217. function of keys that are used on the other station communications status monitor screen Key Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station communications status monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 12 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 3 Display contents and keys functions other station data link status monitor This section describes the other station data link status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used 4 The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT Displ No Contents of Display 1 Station numbers are shown up to the maximum number of linked stations Any station that is not data linked is highlighted on screen Any station specified as a reserved station is treated as a station that stays in a normal condition 2 Key Functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the other station data link status monitor screen Key Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station data link status monitor
218. g Stant 0 Stop Time Out 5 Stop Signal stop Me 8 Torque Limit Pos Started X Axis 012 16 BUSY z Y axis 012 M Code ON E 12 x ce Creep Speed 01294567 01234567 Zero Duell Time WOT Err Man PulsEBr M Petes nooo ated X Axis 012 17 Batt ErrW HWi MCode ErrCode O12 01 012 O01 Axis O12 i 2 13 14 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal 1 The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is __ __ displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 2 The set manual pulser run enabled disabled status is displayed 47 347 3 The data number during execution of current positioning is displayed 48 348 4 The remaining pointer value is displayed 39 339 5 The current value during execution of current positioning is displayed E 6 The change value of the current value is displayed p zd e change valu played 42 342 E el 7912 7922 7 The zero address set value is displayed 7913 7923 8 The set value of the output speed is displayed 600 601 9 The set value of the speed limit is displayed 7874 7894 10 The change value of the speed change is displayed 40 340 11 The set value of the zero return speed is displayed 7914 7924 12 The set value of the zero return creep speed is displayed 7915 7925 13 The set value of the M code is displayed 0 M code not used 46 346 14 The error code is displayed when an error occurs
219. ghted NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 15 2147483648 DW ZR 1042431 32767 X 0001 M 25 200 43 R 50 68378428 DW D 0 0 100 0 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 4 Quick test for the word device T C monitor and buffer memory eds When displaying the device monitor screen DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET Touch the display position of the device to be changed NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 15 2147483648 DW ZR 1042431 32767 X 0001 e M 25 SPW 0 43 R 200 68378428 DW D 50 0 w 100 0 dus The change value input screen is displayed HETWK No 0 STATION FF Enter the current value to be changed in the KEY window DEVICE W 200 See Section 8 1 3 for the KEY window operations 7 8 9 J B di 456l cD 1 12 13 EJF 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT MEMO 10 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SYSTEM MONITORING MELSEC GOT Chapter10 Error display and handling with system monitoring The following chart shows the error messages that may be displayed when operating the system monitor and the method of handling them Error Message Description Method of Handling Check the following PLC e Connections between the c min nicati ns Communication could not be PLC CPU
220. h screen operation when using the system monitor function PONT With any of the four windows when changing the station monitor device or executing the test operation it is not possible to do an operation with another window until that series of operations is finished 9 1 Screen configuration common operations and changing screens when monitoring The common operations of each monitor function such as screen configuration and target PLC CPU specification when executing system monitoring are described below 9 1 1 Basic screen configuration and key functions menu 9 The basic screen configuration displayed in the windows and the key functions displayed on the screen are shown below 1 Display DEV MON BAT MON TC MON BM MON END 2 Key functions The functions of keys that are used with the basic screen operation are shown in the chart below Function The entry monitor is executed with the applicable window see Sec 9 2 The batch monitor is executed with the applicable window see Sec 9 3 The timer counter monitor is executed with the applicable window see Sec 9 4 The buffer memory monitor is executed with the applicable window see Sec 9 5 System monitoring ends display returns to the screen where system monitors function started DEV MON BAD MON TC MON BM MON END 9 OPERATION OF THE VAR
221. he menu ENO Inputs X Gutputs tY o0 CH3 Output Loop Control ma Error Reset s CHS Unlimited WOT Error Conversion READY Error Detection CH3 Up Limit CH3 Low Limit E Loop Control x Resol Selection Resol Selection Volt Current CH2 Volt Current me CHS Volt Curreny I Offset Gain Set Resolution Resolution MMI C3 PB Pw CO J c cn E c3 P3 e Oo The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 23 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 10 A1S64DA module monitor 12 10 1 Operation monitor Data MONIT A1S64AD Operation Monitor Screen RESET Chg menu ENO 1 Channel No 4321 0 A D Conversion Disabled Betting 0110110110110110 1 A D Conversion Enabled Sample Average Time Count Sample Average Time Count 2 Chann No 4321 4321 0 Sampling 0 Count average 3 setting 0110110110110110 1 Averaging 1 Time Average Time Count Input Status Input Status Input Status value Resolution 1 Resolution 2 Resolution 3 Channel 1 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 2 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 3 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Channel 4 01234 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 4 5 Err
222. he I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed An I O signal is ON when it is displayed in a reverse display 12 109 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 26 4 Monitoring graphs SET EHM eno AS4AD Graph Monitor Screen RESET Chg END Input Output 0 50 100 emp Value Module amp 25 50 75 100 Code Channel 1 01294 01 9 Channel 2 01294 01 1 2 Channel 3 01294 01 Channel 4 01294 01 Scale 0 For module codes 06 07 16 amp 17 Bottom Scale 0 For all other module codes Channel 4321 B Error 4 P Enable Valid 0110110110110110 D F Enabled 0000 B Hodule 1 Fault 5 B Hodule 2 Fault 0 Effective B Hodule 3 Fault 1 Invalidity Bg Hodule 4 Fault Buffer memory address amp to reference decimal The current I O value a value between 0 to 1000 or 0 to 2000 for the digital I O value of the various channels is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 10 to 13 The temperature detection values for the various channels are displayed 18 to 21 The module codes for installed modules for the various channels are displayed 28 to 31 The specified effective invalid status for the analog output enable signal for each of the channels is displayed 27 0 Effective 1 Invalid The specified status for the output enable command of each of the channels is displayed 0 The off
223. he error code is displayed when an error occurs The output status of each channel is displayed 0 OFF 1 ON The set limit switch output enable disable status for each channel is displayed 0 Enable 1 Disable The sensor binary current value is displayed After module conversion of the sensor binary current value to mm or inches the value added to the minimum current value is displayed as the scaling binary current value The set value of the positioning object stop position is displayed The program number used with the limit switch output function is displayed The answer back program number corresponding to the program number used with the limit switch output function is displayed The A62LS operation mode status is displayed b4b3b2b1b0 Run Trial run Set 1 is displayed in the bit corresponding to et canes the selected operation mode The number of multi dogs that are set is displayed 12 to 226 The set value for the on position and off position of the multi dog No is displayed for each channel 12 to 226 12 16 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 7 2 I O monitor SETZ Data MONIT 862LS Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che menu ENP Inputs X2 iu MN HDT Error 0 10 PLC READY 1 Online 1 1 fil Posit Start 2 Upper Lim Errore B fle Posit Stop 3 ME Lower Lim Errores 3 H3 Fwd Jog Start 1 ert
224. he ladder monitor test function you need to repeat the PC readout procedure to enable the display of the modification BM monitor 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT Connection with FXCPU third party PLC or microcomputer Ref FXCPU J Functions Section Other PLC connection Microcomputer connection CPU direct connection Adjusting the brightness contrast Section adjustment of a monitor screen 4 3 Selecting a message display Section Copying the screen and OS data A Screen amp between the internal memory and Section OS copy 44 memory card T Setting a use environment ofthe Section function Running di Tio check Seci Self test unning diagnostic checks on ection GOT hardware 4 6 Memory Displaying GOT memory Section information information 4 7 Displaying the display area bd cleanup screen Password Defining a password for limited 522 access to the utility menu screen 4 10 Ladder Sequence program monitoring Section monitor using ladder signals 6 2 1 T Decimal and hexadecimal display penay of word device values Section 9 Device comment display lt x x Device Section changing Changing of device values 624 Section Print out Printing of ladder 6 2 5 Entry Monitoring of current values by Section monitor pre registering monitor devices E Monitoring of n points of current x x Batch values subsequent to specified Section monitor f E device Monitoring of m points of current values set values
225. he specified temperature measurement range in the input range Hardware error occurs L L O Alert alarm 1 is turned on a Bm Bl 1 Alert alarm 2 is turned on O L Alert alarm 3 is turned on O El L Alert alarm 4 is turned on O L igi The heater disconnection alarm ra is detected The loop disconnection is detected B C The current error m when the output is off is detected Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference hexadecimal A is displayed in the column corresponding to the warning 05 07 details detected for each channel 12 112 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 27 3 Operation monitor CH1 to CH4 4 8 5 2 SET Data MONIT RESET Che END 1 SC point position 0 3 4 4 P P z 012345 Man Val O 100 PV 0 0123 5 SV Dec P P 0 0123 5 MV X mm 1 1 6 7 pr 5 0123 5 Integral time I 0123 sec Derivative time D O123sec1 34 9 10 L durite error MI or address 0123 Cause Default setting registration 34 12 11 Blert alarm No 1 2 3 4 13 Set Val Dec P P 0 j 012345 i 012345 1 012345 i 012345 N SV 0 0123 5 1 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 14 Mode setting E O1 1 O1 O1 O1 NE mnm Heat cur pro vI Heat val com set Output iUppe
226. he test operation ON OFF of bit devices modifying current value of a word device modifying timer counter setting modifying the current value or modifying the current value of a buffer memory of system monitor special function module monitor and ladder monitor In addition never modify data in a test operation to a device which performs a crucial operation to the system It may cause an accident by a false output or malfunction Revisions The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover PrintDate Manual Number Jan 2000 SH NA 080069 A First edition May 2000 SH NA 080069 B Uc EE additions Er MEER 2 4 1 4 5 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property rights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION A 2 INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum Please forward a copy of this manual to the end user Whereabouts and Usage of This Manual The manuals relating to SW4D5C GOTR PACKE are available in the following types The manuals are classified according to their purposes Please read the pr
227. he upper part of the key is M N 9 4 7 available 9 pr W Ud i wo U V JULW Ji wp Function indicated at the lower part of the key is LD AND END available JUD FJLY Zz J o5 gt 2 e m te ORI MCR s Js ORB PLS 6 7 J f cu fouT if sp 01 2 3 J o I m gt 2 n AM 4 J gt W N 2 AI VL B POINTS To switch between two functions of keys functions indicated at upper and lower parts of the keys press the SHIFT and SET keys For details see Section 20 1 1 3 14 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 2 Cursor display The GOT controls the display of the cursor when the user has to input data it displays gg at the cursor position For more information see Paragraph 6 below If the cursor overlaps the display of a character however the character and gy alternate on the display 3 Indication of the selected line When a program list is displayed the line currently selected for editing is indicated gt appearing immediately after the step number pe 3rd line in the display area is selected for editing R 0 LD X0005 2 1 AND M2 2rPO0OUT TO 3 K123 You can use the and keys to move and down 4 Step number display A step number is displayed as a decimal number On
228. i3 3 3 2 CH2 Disconnectedi4 4 14 Q5 15 5 5 5 5 5 T E 7 8 8 18 3 9 3 A A A B B B C E D D D E E E F F The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 19 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 8 3 Graph monitor MELSEC GOT SET E A1S62RD Graph Monitor Screen RESET Che menu END pop Disabled Enabled 21 2 0110110110110110 Pe 500 1 400 Enabled 0 Disabled ang Convers ion 21 3 n 0110110110110110 a tLe 200 1 Completed 0 Not Completed i00 r Averages Sample Time Count B 0 21 21 0110110110110110 100 4 1 Averaging 1 Time Average 180 0 Sampling 0 Count Average 1 2 WB Channel 1 disconnected WB Channel 2 disconnected Error Temp Sensor Type 0 6 MeError Code 012345 0 IIS DIM 1 019 JIS Contents of display The temperature detection value of each channel is displayed as a graph Buffer memory address to reference decimal The specified conversion enabled disabled status for each channel is displayed The status of the Conversion Complete flag for each channel is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing sampling processing of each channel is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing of each cha
229. ic operation e Touch to select options e Touching will display a message asking you to answer the question Do you want to execute f you answers Yes to the question touch again Touch to select another option To quit the backup copy touch to return to the Utility Menu screen b To return to the Utility Menu screen e Touch to return to the Utility Menu screen 4 On screen error messages Corrective Action Cancel write protect M Release write protection of The memory card is write protected function the memory card card is not installed on the Install a memory card Install memory card the GOT a II Format memory card MEMON cals Format the memory card formatted Write Error M CARD Change the memory card Memory card loaded has memory capacity shortage for the one having enough space less than written data Data transfer error memory space Write error occurred in the memory Change the memory card card during copying or the memory or increase the free space M CARD error Data transfer error card used has no free space of the memory card The hardware of the installed Replace the memory card Memory card error memory card is defective with a new one 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT b Directory tree in a memory card The directory tree in a memory card is shown as follows
230. ication board Abbreviation of ASGT QBUS2S type multi drop bus connection board Abbreviation of ASGT BUSSU type bus connection unit Serial communication board Communication board Abbreviation of A7GT BUSS type bus connection unit Abbreviation of A7GT BUS2S multi drop bus connection unit gt N O a c gt 2 N Data link unit E Abbreviation of A7GT J71BR13 type network unit gt 2 gt NIN e a zi cic cic c 9 gc m2 p 00 0 Ur gt DU f E Aim N oja w 2 UJ Network unit Generic term of A7GT J71LP23 and A7GT J71BR13 Abbreviation of ABGT J61B15 CC Link communication unit Bus connection unit Generic term of ASGT QBUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A7GT BUSS and A7GT BUS2S CC Link communication unit Generic term of ABGT J61BT13 and A8GT J61BT15 Communication unit Generic term of bus connection unit data link unit network unit and CC Link communication unit Abbreviation of A7GT J71AP23 type data link unit Abbreviation of ABGT J61B13 CC Link communication unit Abbreviation of ASGT BUS2SU type multi drop bus connection unit A9GT 50LT type backlights Debug stand PC card memory card Abbreviation of ASGT FNB A9GT FNB1M A9GT FNB2M A9GT FNB4M A9GT FNB8M A9GT QFNB A9GT QFNBAM A9GT QFNBS8M type option function memory board Abbreviation of ASGT 80PSC A9GT 70PSC A9GT 60PSC and A9GT 50PSC type transparent Protection sheet s protection sheets Memory board
231. ice No DEVICE D DEVICE D ieri Mr F via m U x F 2 G gt Select input area Alphanumeric Enter device name and device No 1 1 Move to ladder monitor screen 2 Touch Input confirmation 6 7 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 1 When specifying and reading the step number in the program Step Sea Touch 9 Input step No 1 Move to ladder monitor screen Touch Input confirmation When specifying and reading the final ladder in the program End Sea Move to ladder monitor screen Touch 1 Data being entered can be cleared by the following keys AC Clears all data being entered to the target area DEL Clears one character at the cursor position 2 When specifying and reading a device contact point or coil used in the program the search targets all programs starting from the step number displayed on the previous ladder monitor screen to the program immediately previous to the one displayed After moving to the screen monitor screen continuous reading
232. ied ps ie OFF 26 SW8 SW7 SW6 SW5 SW4 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 12 64 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 20 3 Parameter data monitor SET Data MONIT D Parameter Data Monitor Screen RESET Che END Start imi 2 01234567890 In position Range 012345 PLS Forward start Reverse Start imi 3 01234567990 Feedback Pulses 012345 PL BEN Fud Jog Start Rev Jog Start Electronic Gear 4 01237 0123 Rotation Direction 0 ag el Pos Restart Posit Complete Bystem Setting 5 0 Torque Limit 012345 zero Rtn RequestRegen Resistance 6 0 elocity Limit 0123456 PLS s IE ero Rtn Start Zero Rtn Comple Motor Ty Accel Time 012545 ms ator Capacity 0123 5 KH Decel Time 012345 ms 9 matu In position otor Rotations 012945 rpm Positioning Mode 0 1 m gis servo OFF 0 os Loop Gain 012345 rad s Amplifier Ver Ag1WO12 ABC pM switchoved 4 1 Loop Gain 012345 Test Mode 0110110110110110 WOT Error 12 87654321 Error Detection Mel Integration 012345 ms 8 Switch 0110110110110110 reference decimal a UE ur I O signal is on when displayed in a reverse display The set value PLS of the lower stroke limit is displayed 4 The command pulse ratio numerator CMX and denominator CDV are displayed 5 The set status of the system is displayed 10 0 MR SB standard 1 MR SB absolute values Th
233. ify the Delete the specified range of Specify the range ofthe _ in the Delete mode deletion star step the program program for deletion L GO gt Specify the deletion GO end step Delete the whole NOP in Display the program gt HELP 1 Delete the whole NOP ihe program inthe Delete inode 20 14 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST 20 3 6 Operation in Parameter mode P Procedures key input sequence Return the parameters to Clearing all parameters SN the initial setting status Parameter setting for AOJA2HCPU Setting of latch range Setting of step relay Completion of setting write Parameter setting other than AOJ2HCPU Setting of memory capacity M L S setting other than AnA AnUCPU M L S setting AnA AnUCPU only Timer setting other than AnACPU Timer setting AnACPU Counter setting AnACPU only Setting of latch range WDT setting Setting of I O control system only for ASHCPU and A3MCPU Completion of setting write Set the parameters for the A0J2HCPU Select the latch range from No latch 1 2 latch and All latch Set the availability 51536 to 2047 of the step relay When the parameter setting is complete write the PLC CPU Set the parameters other than AOJ2HCPU Set the main sequence program capacity and the file register capacity relay Set the top devi
234. ignal Upper limit Lower limit 12 93 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 11 Monitoring axis control data SET Data MONIT ADTSP Axis Control Data RESET che ENP Sreten Axis1 Axis2 Axisa 4107 1 um i Correct ing 10 5 inch i 1 01234567830 01234567890 01234567890 1 Address x10 5 deg i aa E eeaeee Sus fat es S LAES J cub 410 5 mm min Correcting x10 3 inch min 2 ened 410 8 deg min 012345678 012345678 012345678 3 FRERG 012 0121 olz d o Disable E warid eer t Erabi Diu Unit 3 Pree Mode No eet Completed 8 E MENT NEN a Disable i 7 EXT Start Enable Enable c D ox 0 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The value for the current value change is displayed The speed change value is displayed The override value in relation to the positioning speed is displayed The ON OFF status for the flag indicating whether step action is effective is displayed this flag confirms the actions of the various positioning data in the step function 1 Step effective step action is carried out 0 Step invalid step action is not carried out This displays the module to be used for step action in operation based on the step function 1 Step action in data nu
235. ilable this indicates None instead Ctrl St Info 17 5 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT No Section Contents of Display Total of L Sta Indicates the maximum number of the stations to be linked The maximum number is defined by common parameters Largest Nrm Sta Indicates the station number of the largest station that is connected in a normal condition Largest DL Sta Indicates the station number of the largest station that is data linked Com Status Show the current communications status of the own station D Link in prog D Link Stop A D Link Stop B Pass 3 D Link Info excut Disconnection Testing Reset in prgr Causes of Ssp Indicates the causes why the communications were interrupted This indicates OK if communications is in a normal condition Normal Offline Offline Test Others error codes Causes of Stop Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped This indicate OK if the data link is in a normal condition No common para Host Para error Instructed by Other Station n station Essential Parameter Not Matched Instructed by Host Station Improper I O Allocation Instructed by All Stations n stations Others error codes Constant LS Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans FLoop Shows the status of the primary loop lines of the own station Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo RLoop Shows the status of the secondary
236. ilding block type CPU such as the A1SCPU is recognized as the A1S68AD and monitored as such Since the buffer memory composition of the A68AD and the A1S68AD is not the same different data is displayed on the screen when monitoring the A68AD displayed as the A1S68AD An A68AD that is installed in the base unit of the building block type PLC CPU such as the AnUCPU can be monitored normally 3 6 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT c When monitoring the A1SD75M AD75M The A1SD75M AD75M is displayed as A1SD75P AD75P The A1SD75M AD75M can be monitored within the monitoring range of the A1SD75P AD75P d When monitoring the A81 CPU The A81CPU is monitored in the following way prre ral 64 points in first half 64 points in last half Change to module that cannot be Treatment of A81CPU Change to input module monitored System configuration zu Display Special X Y i Display Input 64 X1 Screen Possibility of monitoring Not possible Can be monitored as input e When monitoring an I O composite module 1 With an I O composite module for which Output 2 is displayed on the System configuration screen only the output signal can be monitored For the input signal monitor X of the PLC CPU device with the system monitor function 4 Editing and allocating of special module monitor data Data displayed on a special module monitor screen cannot be edited by modifying or adding an object except that the data ca
237. ime 3 1 to 65535 012345 O12845 O12845 SEC i 1 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal Axis 3 With the positioning operation acceleration time 1 through acceleration time 3 from speed 0 until the speed limit is attained 41 186to 191 336 to 341 is displayed With th itioni i leration time 1 th h ith the positioning operation deceleration time 1 throug 42 to 47 TR ME 192 to 197 34210347 deceleration time 3 from the speed limit to 0 speed is displayed Sees 12 85 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 5 Zero return parameter monitor 1 Basic parameters for zero return SETZ Data MONIT AD75P OPR Basic Parameter RESET Chg menu ENP Parameter valid Range 1 1 P wis 3hxis 0 006 4iCount d 1 Stopper i S Count e 1 Method 2 8topper Z Q d 0 ponis RF 2 Direction O Forward 1 i Reverse oS 0_ reld7483648 ta 21474835647 10 1 pm 3 Address 10 5 inch 01234567830 012345678390 01234567890 PLS 0 ta 35999999 o ERI 310 SONGS oe o oeste nere 10 2 mm min a600000000 x10 3 inch mm i 4 Return Speed 10 3 deg mml 1838878 012345678 Red 1 to 1000000 x10 2 mm min a600000000 10 3 inch mml 5 Creep Speed
238. information SET Data MONIT END RIT1ID Set Up Information Monitor Screen RESET chg MENU Valid range CH1 CHe 1 t ID Command Continual Write Comparison Write 2 Address Data 07 4094 17 3900 0123 123Hord K 0123 0123Hord 3 r Retry Ose To 01294 01254 4 Total Communica 0125456799 0123456789 5 Comparison bisagreementliorr Wi 9 Cub EUN LE Ro LN 7 LED Status Wh ceai her ERR gt eR Err Err Record Latst Mord Munber Error l Data Career Absent Error Pasti Evecut in ities Erer fata Career Erer 8 Past Wite Incemplet ion Comed pecution Error Past3 Set Up Address Error Commend Code Error Past4 Set Up Mord Hunter Error Comunicote Condition Error Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal CH1 CH2 The output command for the data carrier is displayed The first address for the data carrier which is reading and writing the data is displayed along with the number of processing points for the data being read and written The number of retries when a data communications error occurs is displayed The number of communications accumulated number of times for the data carrier is displayed exclusing the CM CL OF and ON commands The results of executing the compare command CM are displayed The direction in which data is copied when the copy data co
239. ing entered is displayed on the right side of the screen DEC Enter in decimal Enter hexadecimal 3 Even when the setting value current value is changed after the timer T has timed out and the counter C has finished counting the time up status count up status do not change The current status is maintained When the setting value is changed to a large value when the current value is changed to a small value 9 18 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 6 2 Quick test function Operation procedu re In addition to the existing tests for the direct input of device station No etc during monitoring with the system monitor function this function enables the bit device SET RESET word device buffer memory data to change by a single touch 1 Operation to set the quick test function on To perform the quick test functions perform the following operations Display one of the system monitor screen STATION FF NETWK No 0 D 15 ZR 1042431 X 0001 M 25 Ww 200 R 50 D 0 Ww 100 2147483648 DW 32767 e 43 68378428 DW DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATIONIFF 104 QUICK TEST MODE SET Zo xZzxNo 100 DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET NETWK No 0 STATION FF QUICK TEST 15 1042431 D
240. inked The maximum number is defined by common parameters Largest Nrm Sta Indicates the station number of the largest station that is connected in a normal condition Largest DL Sta Indicates the station number of the largest station that is data linked Com Status Show the current communications status of the own station D Link in prog D Link Stop A D Link Stop B Pass excut Disconnection Testing Reset in prgr Causes of Ssp Indicates the reason why the communications were interrupted This indicates OK if communications is in a normal condition Normal Offline Offline Test Others error codes Causes of Stop Indicates the causes why the data link was stopped This indicates OK if the data link is in a normal condition No common para Host Para error Instructed by Other Station n station Essential Parameter Not Matched Instructed by Host Station Improper Allocation Instructed by All Stations n stations Others error codes Constant LS Constant LS Indicates the predetermined time of constant link scans LoopBK Info FLoop Shows the status of the primary loop lines of the own station Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo RLoop Shows the status of the secondary loop lines of the own station Normal LoopBK Trans D Link Impo FLoop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the primary loop e
241. ipheral device for FX S0 stu lt 0000 X0000 c 20 X0000 When ladder monitoring with GOT 5 so H lt Y00005 X0000 c Ss X0000 S SS J H c SE S21 d When searching for STL instruction search for S state in the device search 2 When making connection with the motion controller CPU a When the OS version is SV5 in the SVST instruction J appears as the tag name of MC 6 16 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 2 3 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal and turning the comment display on off You can switch the display form decimal hexadecimal of the word device value or the timer counter value that is displayed on the ladder monitor screen You can also specify whether or not to display a comment for the object device 1 Switching the display form decimal hexadecimal When monitoring display the word device current value the timer counter current value upper row or the set value lower row in decimal or hexadecimal When decimal is displayed the display changes to hexadecimal 2 Switching the comment display on and off Display the comment that is written in the object PLC CPU When no comment is displayed this turns on the comment display Comment display priority order expanded comment gt Japanese character comment or Japanese comment The display change operation is explained below
242. is table shows the key functions used with the operations on the ladder monitor screen Function Exit Return to screen where ladder monitor function starts PLCRD Move to PLC read screen to read sequence program being monitored from PLC CPU PLC read Menu Move to ladder monitor menu screen to specify sequence program to be cat displayed on ladder monitor screen Ladder read Mon Start monitoring of sequence program that is displayed on ladder monitor screen List Activates the List editor function For details of the List editor function see Chapter 19 Sella Switch display device when there are nine or more devices displaying current values and set values Y Display one ladder scroll up or down When reading ladder with device specification read next program with same La device specification see 2 in Sec 6 1 2 After executing PLC read if the PLC CPU comment or comment capacity is changed the comment may not be correctly displayed on the ladder monitor screen When changing the comment or comment capacity re start the GOT 6 14 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 2 When MELSEC QnA ladder monitor is executed a Display 4 ico SEN 7 When comment is not displayed maximum 8 lines O FF PLCRAM MAIN 124STEP z 3 9036 When comment is displayed maximum 3 lines PLs 1
243. isconn 6 Error Code 012345 0 TIS DIN 1 019 JIS gp CH4 disconn Ng CHE disconn 7 8 Buffer memory address No f ot display to reference decimal The temperature detection value of each channel is displayed in a graph 10 to 17 2 The specified conversion enabled disabled status of each channel is displayed The conversion complete flag status for each channel is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing sampling processing of each channel is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing of each channel is displayed A E is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs 6 A is displayed when a writing data error occurs the channel where it occurred and the error code are displayed 7 The specified status of the platinum temperature sensor that is used is 36 displayed For A68RD4 For A68RD3 8 A is displayed a channel where a broken wire was detected A I is displayed in CH1 when a broken wire is detected any channel 12 38 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 15 A1S68DAI A1S68DAV module monitor The contents displayed on each monitor of the A1S68DAI module and A1S68DAV module are nearly identical except for the sections displaying the module format The A1S68DAV module monitor screen is used as an example in each of the following sections 12 15 1 Operation monitor
244. isplayed 601 The set value of the speed limit is displayed 7894 The change value of the speed change is displayed 340 The set value of the jog speed is displayed 344 The set value of the jog speed limit is displayed 7895 The set value of the M code is displayed 0 M code not used 346 The error code is displayed when an error occurs 345 The starting data number of each point is displayed 300 to 337 The current value during execution of current positioning is displayed The change value of the current value is displayed The zero address set value is displayed 12 68 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 21 2 Zero return monitor MELSEC GOT SET Data MONIT 071 zero Return Data Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END x Y 3 Axis Axis X Axis Zero Data zm EE ABC Posit Start Exec Data 012 Pt 01 012 Pt 01 0110110110110110 15 Interpolat 10 Y cM m A E Posit Compl Present Value 0123456789 0123456789 Y Axis Zero Data en eo dee ABC 1 Zero Request Change Value 8 123456789 0123456789 0110110110110110 15 Zero Start b vice Ee Ele rut zero Domplete Zero Address 123456785 1 0125456789 R 0 PG Zero Point d i EE Mech Stop Fud Jog Start Output Spee Be Fwd 1 Rev Rev Jo
245. itor function set in the touch switch expanded function of the drawing software In the Utility Menu screen touch NET MON start the network monitor function 15 2 16 SWITCHING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Chapter16 Switching the network monitor screens The following flowchart outlines the steps involved in switching the network monitor Screens Utility menu screen or je user created monitor screen Touch a touch key for the network monitor function Host station monitor screen Touch a module Other station monitor menu screen E UNITI F UNIT2 Ex au n E ol Bo zm oma scene ssa Select a module uu E NETWK No255 uu B 54 oe E IntPLC Net oe I eem al a cur ae e AE UR se Com Status D Link P MTR CPU OP UNITS UNITA 2 pem a RY CPURUN Loop dus Ww MELSECNET ID Tiu E il MELSECNET 2 RET duoc e 4 OSta RmtSta de E 64Sta LocSta le Pat B par E Bae 2 cor me GSP j Em Touch a box Select a RET Select a box RET menu item Detailed own station monitor screen Other station monitor screen etail Info nit
246. ive Data valid Gont nteof display Buffer memory to reference decimal The output status for the separate refresh type remote I O module is displayed 0 OFF 1 ON Output statuses are displayed in the following order for each of the station 300 to 363 numbers 2nd digit 1st digit 4th digit 3rd digit The input status for the separate refresh type remote I O module is displayed 0 OFF 1 ON Input statuses are displayed in the following order for each of the station 600 to 663 numbers 2nd digit 1st digit 4th digit 3rd digit 12 102 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 24 5 Monitoring input and output expansion mode RIT1PT32 8S3 I O Monitor Screen Extension Data MONIT RESET Che meny END ix O mo ce a oO pl n Oo D c D c m cC m c Oc cC D C D c D cC m c dm cm a 2 p eq D eq p eq o eq om D D i D n D t D est D ct t CD Ww D m est D i ES ES Tx Complete No 1 Mm Read Request Tx Complete No l Read Request B R Data Clear Error Read Request 01 Hardware Fault Link Working RTU Error Detect Test Mode Link Error i Link Comms 8 T Domplete No 12 T zu a oO D D m md m mc cm m msmomsdqe C 0 7
247. l 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel A Channel B Channel C B 07 Error Channel D 3 Channel E B crror Channel F Connect No x Channel Mo FEDCBA9676543210 4 Data Format 0110110110110110 Enable 0110110110110119 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Buff Contents of display uffer memory address to reference hexadecimal The connect number of the monitor being used is displayed E i The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output value of each channel is displayed in a graph as a percentage ranging from 100 to 17F 0 to 100 A E is displayed when watchdog timer error occurs ares A E is displayed when an error occurs i tse The set status of the data format for each channel is displayed o US 4 The specified conversion enabled disabled status of each channel is displayed 12 46 10 to 17 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 17 A616DAI A616DAV module monitor The contents displayed on each monitor of the A616DAI module and A616DAV module are nearly identical except for the sections displaying the module format The A616DAI module monitor screen is used as an example in each of the following sections 12 17 1 Operation monitor AB16DAI Operation Monitor Screen Channel No FEDCBASS 765435210 DA Conversion 0110110110110110 bled Output Enable 0110110110110110 1 Enabled Output x Over Under Output X Over Error Erro
248. l condition or out of action is highlighted on screen A station specified as a reserved station is treated as a station that stays ina normal condition 2 Key Functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the other station CPU action status monitor screen Key Function Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the other station CPU action status monitor screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 15 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 6 Display contents and keys functions other station CPU RUN status monitor This section describes the other station CPU RUN status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys This option is not selectable when connecting to a remote I O network system 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 a 960GOT H2 Es 4 5 Bo i S TOP STOP mh 1 EM En Display example m a ae CPU RUN Status uniti a Ei fn Up to 64 station numbers are shown is displayed below station numbers of reserved stations or any stations that come after the maximum number of linked stations 2
249. layed The set status of the data format for each channel is displayed 0 Data format 48 4047 1 Data format 2048 2047 The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output 100 to 17F value of each channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 The error code is displayed when an error occurs 1 is displayed when an error with error code 01 to 03 occurs for any channel The set value of the sampling period is displayed 8 The channels where direct access occurs are displayed The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output value for each channel where direct access occurs is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 12 43 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 16 3 I O monitor SETZ Data MONIT AG16AD Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che menu ENP Inputs 5 Outputs Y 1 HOT Error 10 0 10 READY 1 1 1 Error g 3 13 3 13 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 16 16 7 7 7 T 8 8 8 Direct Access 3 19 3 13 A A A A B B B B 1C 1 D D D D E E E E F LF F 1F The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 44 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 16 4 Graph monitor SETZ Data MONIT amp 6168D Graph Monito
250. llowing keys Clears all data being entered to the target area Clears one character at the cursor position 3 The form of data to be entered is displayed at the right side of the screen DEC Enter in decimal HEX Enter in hexadecimal 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 1 4 Changing screens This section shows the screen changes when executing each monitoring operation of the system monitor function from the status where the user created monitor screen is displayed Start User created monitor screen 1 Touch the key that sets the touch switch expanded function with the graphics software and start the System monitor operation Touch 1 When the Utility screen is dislayed touch PLC MON to start the system monitor function Utility screen The circuit monitor function and special module function can also be started from the Utility screen Touch END Touch Touch STOP 2 Basi p de dun Touch FORM Function change menu screen 3 1 See Sec 9 1 1 Touch SET 4 Touch MENU Touch Touch STOP Touch FORM Display change menu screen See Sec 9 1 2 Monitor screen for selected function Touch EXEC Test menu screen Touch STOP Device setting menu scree
251. llowing operation 19 4 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 19 2 2 Selection and operation of mode After the keyword input select the mode in the list editor function for operations in Chapter 20 1 Selection and change of mode with mode key Select the mode with the mode key Refer to 3 5 5 so that operation corresponding to the mode in Chapter 20 may be performed The mode can be freely changed when operations in Chapter 20 are performed Various operations can be continued while changing modes 1 READ _ Read mode WRITE Write mode INSERT Insert mode DELETE Delete mode Parameter mode OTHER Other mode 1 Mode key input is always valid Input of the mode key clears the input data except for the step numbers The display returns to the initial status of the mode selection 2 Operation in each mode The mode selected in 1 allows for operation corresponding to the mode in Chapter 20 Operation procedures of each mode are described in Chapter 20 Operate the GOT according to the description If an error message appears during operation take action according to Chapter 21 19 5 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT MEMO 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT Chapter 20 Operation of Editing Screen for
252. loop Rloop Back Station Indicates the station number of a station that executes the loopback along the secondary loop e of Loop Switching Indicates the cumulative number of times for which loops have been switched 2 Key functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the detailed own station monitor screen RET Returns to the own station monitor screen Exits the detailed own station monitor screen and returns to the END previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed Changes the details on the window only for A95 GOT 17 3 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 2 2 Display contents and keys functions acting as a MELSECNET B or MELSECNET Il local station This section describes the detailed own station monitor screen and the function of on Screen keys all of which are displayed and used when the own station acts as the local station on the MELSECNET B or MELSECNET II 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used The display details are the same Derai inio unia as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT Touch 5 button to change the ro A display of Loop Switching Display example Section Contents of Display e This Station s 1 TsSt Info Indicates the station number of the own station This Station s Indicates the c
253. mber modules 0 Step action in reduced speed modules The ON OFF status of the skip command is displayed 1 Request for skip in progress 0 Request for skip has been completed No request The display shows whether control based on an external startup signal is effective or invalid 1 External startup effective 0 External startup invalid 12 94 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 12 Monitoring the output speed SETZ Data 75 Dutput Speed RESET Che END Axist Axise Aisa 012545670 012345678 012545678 x10 3 inch min 410 3 inch min 410 3 deg min PLS sec 012545670 012345678 012545678 Axis Speed Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal When positioning the actual speed taking the override and the speed limit value into consideration is displayed When using interpolation operation the target speeds for the composite speed reference axis speed are displayed on the reference axis side and 0 is displayed on the other axis side When using jogging operation the actual speed taking the jogging speed limit value into consideration is displayed The speed set for the positioning data is displayed When using interpolation operation the target speeds for the composite speed reference axis speed
254. memory address Contents of display y to reference decimal This displays whether the torque command electrical current command for the motor is controlled by the rated torque written in the motor catalog x the torque limit value 0 When motor is rotating within set torque limit 1 Limited sequence program such as a data error or BUSY in progress stop due to an external signal when starting or when a startup is in progress 15 The error code output from the servo amp that was converted into an error code for AD7OD is displayed The change value PLS of the current value is displayed The change value PLS of the speed position travel distance is displayed 86 87 The change value of the velocity change is displayed The set value of the JOG velocity is displayed 2 The change value of the torque limit is displayed 89 The actual number of revolutions of the motor is displayed The motor current is displayed as 100 of the rated current The data for monitoring the load of the regeneration resistance is displayed The maximum torque is displayed when it is 100 of the rated torque Valid when using peripheral equipment SW i GP AD70DP DE T E RENE 25 2 Servo Test mode ready OFF normal Test mode 1 See request ready ON 3 error Contents of display Contents of display The set status of the AD7OD slide switch is displayed SW8 SW7 SW SW SW a
255. mi Print 1 H 3 As the test window will open perform the operation by H seeing Sec 9 6 After the device change is complete the changed contents H can be verified in the ladder monitor 1 H z 1 H NETWK 0 STATION FF SET RST VALUE16 BM VAL16 List gt Je SET VAL VALUE32 BM VAL32 fe Es 1 Print 3 When using A960GOT EL NOTE The current value display of the word device becomes hidden from view due to the test window Using the key entries the hidden current NETWK NO 0 STATION FF 5 value display be displayed by scrolling to the right left SET RST VALUE16 BM VAL16 SET VAL VALUE32 BM VAL32 E EICIRIELED GI creen Print 3 6 18 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 6 2 5 Printing Printing out during ladder monitoring is described E 177117 When performing printouts of the ladder monitor screen always install the option driver to GOT A printout on paper of a ladder monitor screen can be generated for the TFT STN type screen display For the EL
256. mmand CO is executed is displayed The lighting status of the error LED is displayed A I is displayed when an error occurs The error codes for the five most recent times that an error has occurred is displayed 12 106 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 26 A84AD module monitor 12 26 1 Action monitor Data M NIT RESET Che AB4AD Operation Monitor Screen Input Output Status X Temp value Module O P OZP C Code Channel 1 01234 6 01234 2 3 Channel 2 01234 6 01234 4 Channel 3 01234 6 01234 5 hannel 01234 6 01234 Loaded 02 04 05 10 12 05 07 15 17 16 184 106 iting Data Error Module 13 14 15 18 1R 1E 1F CH 0 0 6 Code 1C 1E 1F Channel 4321 B Error B Module 1 Fault D P Enable Valid 0110110110110110 B Module 2 Fault 9 B Module 3 Fault Enabled B Module 4 Fault 7 8 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The current I O data a value between 0 to 1000 or 0 to 2000 for the digital I O value 1 of the various channels is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 in the 10 to 13 corresponding module code column 2 The temperature detection values for the various channels are displayed 18 to 21 3 The codes for installed modules for the various chan
257. monitor Data MONIT 1 Operation Monitor Screen FEDCBASB8 76543210 Error Cade 01 4 1 Enable 0110110110110110 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Error FEDCBRAS8785543210 CNT 0110110110110110 2 rData Format FEDCBASS 76545210 Setting 0110110110110110 Sampling time 01234 ms 5 Input Status For Data Format 0 Refer to left hand side values 8 Farmat 1 Refer to right hand side values CH G 01234 6 01234 6 8 01234 6 01234 6 CH 1 01234 8 01234 6 CH 9 01234 6 012354 6 CH 2 01254 6 01234 6 CH A 01234 6 01234 6 CH 3 o1254 6 3 01234 6 B 01234 6 01234 6 CH 4 01234 6 01234 6 CH C 01234 6 01294 6 5 01234 6 01234 6 CH D 01234 6 01294 6 CH 6 01234 6 01234 6 01234 6 01294 65 CH 01234 6 01234 6 CH 01234 6 1234 65 Direct Access INPUT 0 HE CH I P l234 65 01234 6 Buffer memory address to No Contents of displ reference hexadecimal 1 The specified conversion enabled disabled status of each channel is F displayed The set status of the data format for each channel is displayed 0 Data format 48 4047 1 Data format 2048 2047 The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output value of each channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 The channels where direct access occurs are displayed The current output value a value between
258. mple of reading the area using the MOV command in the sequence program Operation example 1 READ HELP HELP MENU Input the HELP key in 1 READ the Read mode 2 COMMENT DISPLAY CLEAR END 2 1 READ 1 2 Select Read 1 STEP 2 INSTRUCTION CLEAR END HELP MEN 3 2 READ 2 Select Command KEY IN STEP NO CCLEAR END HELP MENU 4 MOV READ Set the MOV command KEY IN STEP NO MOV CLEAR END HELP MENU 5 GO Reading MOV 020 K2Y0018 13 of the 13th step 13 K2Y0018 6 GO 6 D20 2 13 gt MV 13 020 Message when the MOV NOT FOUND command is not present after the 13th step Now reading the command with the Help function command specification is completed 20 11 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 2 Displaying Kana comment The following example shows the procedure of displaying the Kana comment in the Read mode Operation example HELP MENU Input the HELP 1 READ the Read mode 2 COMMENT DISPLAY CLEAR END DOMMENT DISP 2 Select the Kana comment display 1 YES 2 NO HELP MENU R OLD X0000 Select 1 Kana comment display 2 1 QUI 20 Display the Kana comment of 2 LD X0000 the device at the cursor position Motor start limit 0 LD X0000 1 gt QUT Y0020 2 LD X0000 Motor star
259. n See Sec 9 6 AES See Sec 9 1 3 Touch TEST 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 2 Entry monitor Enter the device to be monitored in advance The function that monitors only the device that was entered is called the entry monitor The entry monitor operation when executing the system monitor function is explained below 9 2 1 Basic operation The entry monitor operation procedure is shown below See Sec 9 1 1 Operation procedure Select Device Monitor with the basic screen M When a screen other than the basic screen is displayed touch MENU at the top of the currently displayed screen display the basic screen and select Device Monitor ee When you touch MENU you return to the basic screen When you touch FORM you can change this display See Sec 9 1 2 When you touch SET you can specify the monitor station and device See Sec 9 1 3 PRESS SET KEY SELECT ITEM THEN ENTER DEVICE TYPE amp NO 2 Enter the monitor device 1 Set the station and device to be monitored For the setting method see Sec 9 1 3 When entry is complete display the Device 1 Monitor device entry is in station modules Monitor screen 7 If you change the station for the monitor device all monitor devices entered before that are invalid 2 A maximum of 8 entr
260. n above command key input Other than above device key input Command code Input the command code Command gt Device gt Device No gt and 1 device and 1 device Input the command other than above with the Input the between the device the source data and the destination command key Input the command other than above without the Input the SP between the command the device the source data and the destination command key 20 3 2 Operation in Write mode W Procedures key input sequence Continuous write in NOP Write modify change of program Program display HELP Set the specified range in mine Wate mode the program to NOP Start step specification GO Final step specification 1 2 Start step specification GO Write the new program modify change 20 13 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 3 3 Operation in Read mode R Procedures key input sequence Read the command of the Specified step number in Step number gt the program Command reading with the specified step number Read the command with the Read the specified Command specified command command in the program Read the comman
261. n be used on a user created monitor Screen 5 Precaution for I O allocation setting a When the QnACPU is connected the head XY numbers are displayed in due order on the special module monitoring system configuration screen if the I O allocation setting is random as shown below When performing special module monitoring always perform the I O allocation in order from slot 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Slot number AD75 A68AD Output Open Head XY number x Set randomly GOT system configuration screen v Special Special Xe Module name not displayed b If the slot assigned to Output in I O allocation is not fitted with a module the GOT displays Input Common to ACPU and QnACPU 6 The system configuration including remote I O stations cannot be monitored 3 7 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 4 Network monitor function specifications POINTS e The memory board is required to use the network monitor function on the A985 97 960GOT e The A95 GOT BD M3 memory extension type is required to use the network monitor function on the A95 GOT When the connection target is the QCPU mode the network monitor function cannot be used e The network status of the MELSECNET 10H cannot be monitored 3 4 1 Network information to be monitored The following table shows the types of network information that can be monitored Table 3 1 Network Information To be Monitored MELSECNET MELSE
262. n the PLC CPU Without peripheral equipment other than the GOT the sequence program can be simply edited Example of command change in the sequence program LD Change LD OUT Y20 MOV DO 01 LD LD f 2 Interlock with the ladder monitor function only when A985 97 960GOT is used The list edit window can be started from the ladder monitor screen with a single touch The list can be edited while viewing the ladder The list can also be displayed from the step line displayed on the ladder monitor STEP 12345 18374 M999 K 1234 D100 D1 D2 D162 D167 1 2 47 90 110 Exit PLcro Mon Menu tist Print Screen 3 The list edit screen can be recorded The hard copy function allows recording the edit screen of the list program 4 Access to other station is available The sequence program of the PLC CPU in other station can be list edited 5 Useful help functions Help functions for read write insert and delete are available on the interactive menu selection system Simple operation is facilitated 6 Comment for each device can be displayed Comment of the device at the cursor position can be displayed W 9 OUT M50 z 10 MOV 10 gt D1 Current value Comment of D1 is displayed 1 16 2 BEFORE BEGINNING OPERATION Chapter2 Before beginning operation MELSEC GOT The r
263. n to perform a diagnostic check Select options as instructed on screen e You will see a message indicating that the selected diagnostic check was successfully completed e If an error is detected you will see a message indicating the occurrence of the error The Image Check allows you to view the following elements 1 The entire screen is displayed in one color Display colors are changed in the order of red green blue 2 Basic figures are displayed including circles and squares 3 Ellipses and checkered patterns are tiled or cascaded on screen 4 11 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FU NCTION 4 7 Displaying GOT memory information memory information 1 Display screen Sample screen MELSEC GOT s SP UNIT DATA NET WORK MON W Version ROM BIOS SYSTEM COMM DRIVER PLC MONITOR PRINT B CODE LADDER A SP UNIT MON SP RECIPE WAVE Installed 2 0 0 2 Features The contents e OS version of GOT memory information include number Status of communications with the PLC CPU Available space in the internal memory Availability of memory cards and available space in a memory card Availability of the ladder monitor function 3 Procedure a Basic operation Touch A V to scroll screens b To return to the Utility Menu screen Touch E to return to the Utility Menu screen 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 8 Setting th
264. nation of the operation for changing the display using the Entry Monitor window as an example The operation procedure is the same for changing the display when selecting windows other than Entry Monitor Operation procedure When you touch Display Entry Monitor screen NETWK No 0 STATION FF DEVICE MONITOR TEST FORM SET ue can be specified 15 10 001 e 25 80000000 DW 8001 D D X M FORM Touch When you touch MENU you return to the basic screen When you touch SET the monitor station and device See Sec 9 1 3 FORM you can change this display The selected FORM display is also found on the screen displayed after selecting the monitor function with the basic screen and on each menu screen in addition to each monitor Screen DEVICE MONITOR TEST FORM SET NETWK 0 STATION FF NUMERIC DEC HEX COMMENT DISPLAY NOTHING CANCEL EXECUTE When you touch interrupted and Change display form DEC HEX Change comment display YES NO 1 To EXECUTE Touch M Return Monitor screen Display monitor station network no and station CANCEL the display change is the display returns to the monitor screen uch the display position of the selected menu After
265. nding on the set parameters If LD LO is input for the parameter setting of MO to 999 and L1000 to L2047 the result is LD MO 20 4 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 5 For extension timer extension counter of AnA and AnNUCPU When the extension timer T256 to T2047 and the extension counter C256 to C1023 are input as the first device of the command input the first device and the device number Ex When OUT T256 D500 is input T b 2 I 5 Go Eck lk 500 The device 0500 for the T256 setting value P on the parameter is automatically displayed P When the extension timer and the extension counter are used be sure to set the 257 points or more and the setting value device D W R on the parameter for both the timer and the counter 20 5 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 1 3 Action if an incorrect key is input 1 Input the CLEAR key before the GO key Then input the correct key Input of the CLEAR key clears the command and the device number that have been input immediately The display returns to the status status before change in the Write mode when the mode is selected 2 When the GO key is input repeat the intended operation Command input procedures can be classified as follows When the CLEAR key is input in the parameter mode the GOT stops the process To continue the o
266. nds from an external speaker Idle time for a screen saver Backlighting for a screen saver Protocol and baud rate when connected to a microcomputer Reverse display Section 4 5 Extension number and slot number for bus connection with QCPU Transmission speed for Computer link connection Transmission speed for Yasukawa PLC connection Transmission speed and address for SIEMENS PLC connection Grip switch enable disable setting A950 handy GOT only The self test include diagnostic checks on GOT hardware as follows Drawing check Font check Self test Memory card check User space in the internal memory check OS space in the internal memory check CPU communications check Touch key check The contents of GOT memory information include OS version number Status of communications with the PLC CPU Available space in the internal memory Availability of memory cards and available Space in a memory card Availability of the ladder monitor function Section 4 6 Memory Section 4 7 information This function can be executed only when the GOT memory is extended and the OS is installed from Chapter 6 the drawing software to the GOT Monitoring the sequence programs on the PLC CPU Setting date and time Displaying the display area cleanup screen Network Monitoring the line status of MELSECNET memory is extended and the OS is installed from Chapter 17 monitor the drawing software to the
267. ned in the memory Ww 5 X0005 0 1 1 JK MNN lt L gt NOP P 47 83647 D100098H The user has entered DMOVP 2147483647 01000 8 Numerical display The following describes the display of numerical values in devices and of constants in a program input by the user Note however that only some examples are shown For details see Chapter 20 Example D1000 1 Display in decimal format Only significant digits are displayed with zero suppression M D1000 16495 2 Display in hexadecimal format Four digits are displayed without zero suppression M D1000 H4231 3 Display in octal format Six digits are displayed without zero suppression M D1000 0041061 4 ASCII format A numerical value in the specified device is read in byte units and converted into associated character codes If a value fell outside the ranges 20H through 7FH and AOH through DFH dots will appear M D1000 ascii B 1 9 Display of an error message An error message will appear on the 4th line of the display area If an error message appears perform corrective action as described in Chapter 21 An error message on the display is cleared when you press any key Then the display resumes the state before the appearance of the error message 3 16 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 5 6 List of List editor function Mode Function Action mode display Write program Writes adds
268. nels are displayed 28 to 31 If the digital values for the various channels have been set to values larger than the 4 maximum value for the various modules a 1 is displayed in the Output Over 22 to 25 column If the digital values for the various channels have been set to values smaller than the 5 maximum value for the various modules a 1 is displayed in the Output Under 22 to 25 column 6 If an error occurs in the data being written the channel on which the error occurred 26 and the error code are displayed The specified effective invalid status for the analog output enable signal for each of 7 the channels is displayed 27 0 Effective 1 Invalid The specified status for the output enable command of each of the channels is displayed 8 0 The offset value is output as an analog value 1 The analog value following D A conversion is output 9 A II is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs A I is displayed when an error occurs in a module on the various channels 12 107 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 26 2 Setting monitor AB4AD Setting Monitor Screen MELSEC GOT Data M NIT Count Time Process ing Sample Average Count Time Channel 1 3 0123 ffset Gain 4 01234 5 01234 Channel 2 0123 0110110110110110 01234 01234
269. ng MELSECNET II connection MELSECNET B connection The special function module on the base of the master station can be monitored Cannot be monitored when the master station is the QnACPU The special function modules on the bases of local stations cannot be monitored 8 When using MELSECNET 10 connection The special function modules on the bases of the control station and normal stations can be monitored Cannot be monitored when the stations are the QnACPU 4 When using CC Link connection remote device station The special function modules cannot be monitored 5 When using CC Link connection intelligent device station The special function modules on the bases of the master and local stations can be monitored 6 When using the system configuration where remote I O stations exist The special function modules cannot be monitored in any connection form 3 3 2 Special function modules to be monitored The modules for which special function monitoring can be done are only those types shown in Section 3 3 3 Monitoring of special function modules other than those can be done with the system monitor function BM Monitor 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 3 3 Memory capacity required for using the special module monitor function The memory capacity required when saving special module monitor data to the GOT built in memory and the memory capacity required when saving to a Personal computer hard disk are shown bel
270. nnel is displayed A I is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs A B is displayed when a writing data error occurs the channel where it occurred and the error code are displayed The specified status of the platinum temperature sensor that is used is displayed For A1S62RD3 A is displayed in a channel where a broken wire was detected For A1S62RD4 A E is displayed in CH1 when a broken wire is detected in any channel 12 20 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 9 A1S63DA module monitor 12 9 1 Operation monitor SET Data HONIT A1S63ADA Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che END Enable Disable 1 Enable A D Conversion 0 Not Completed 1 Completed 1 CH No 321 CH 21 2 Setting 0110110110110110 Set jo110110110110110 Sample Rverage Time Count Samp le Average i Counts Time 3 CH 21 21 0 Sampling 0 Count Average 4 Setting 0110110110110110 1 Averaging Dl Time Average Time Count Input Status X Input Status Input Status X Value Resolution 1 Resolution 2 Resolution 3 5 CH 1 012945 0123 5 0129 5 0123 5 6 CH 2 012545 0125 5 0125 5 0125 5 Upper Limit Lower Limit Digital value Simple Loop Contra CH 3 012345 012345 8 9 012345 10 012345 7 Error Code 012 Resolution Setting 0 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 9 1 12000 Buffer memory address
271. nnns 12 39 12154 Operation MONIO iici riena araia tore et crib pce tea eoe tet Re Ene ad 12 39 12 15 2 era tet ee tee e vend Laas avis aes radia 12 40 12 15 3 Graph monitor sss enne nnne 12 41 A616AD module Monitors 5 pee n pr eripi p Pa 12 42 1216 1 Operation enti e e P np Re a 12 42 12 16 2 Operation monitor connect No 0 to connect No 7 when multiplex module is 12 43 12 16 3 I O moOhltOl riui Por dieat tp eee a ee DR La 12 44 12 17 12 18 12 19 12 20 12 21 12 22 12 23 12 16 4 Graph monltor c eee e tente o e aos lars erp t i o been ee 12 45 12 16 5 Graph monitor connect No 0 to connect No 7 when multiplex module is 12 46 A616DAI A616DAV module monitor enema 12 47 12 17 1 Operation monitor 12 47 12172 I O mODnltOrzs iin dec d re ree Heu idee ho Hep dase 12 48 12 17 3 Giraphiimonitorz uan dade eade ade dt ere 12 49 A616TD module Monitor ci e a en a a ve c s 12 50 12 18 1 Operation monitor INPUT O F sssssssssesseseeeeennennennn nennen nnne nennt 12 50 12 18 2 Operation monitor connect No 0 to connect No 7 when multiplex module is 12 51 1218 35 VO MONO ais ein iore rte etae te
272. nonconductive If any occurrence of the search device is not found as a result of the search a message appears on screen telling that PROGRAM NOT FOUND 1 When an occurrence of the search device is found If an occurrence of the search device is found as a result of the search the search for another defective device will automatically be started Example After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state M669 will be displayed as a device that caused a failure me ae After searching for Coil M120 that is in the OFF state 3 M669 is displayed as a device that is not conductive Example Meo After searching for a device that is in the ON state a 7 device that is conductive is displayed The entire field of Print Cancel the device name and number is highlighted on screen Example WA x This automatically begins searching for the defect that caused M669 to be turned OFF After searching for Coil M669 that is in the OFF state M111 is displayed as a device that is not conductive ono Example ME n M120 Exit PLCRD S 023 Ext PLCRD Mon Menu ts f 1 J Print Cancel Screen Print This automatically begins searching for the defect tha
273. nup 1 Display screen Please press top corner buttons simutaneouslv 2 Features A black screen is displayed when cleaning up the display area This makes the Screen easy to view 3 Procedure a Basic operation Touch the upper right and left corners of the screen at the same time to return to the Utility Menu screen Touch at the same time 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION 4 10 Changing security levels security password 1 Screen display MELSEC GOT Enter password 2 Features e f objects numeric input or touch keys etc are secured by using drawing software their security levels can be changed by entering a password e f the characters entered match a password a message appears on screen telling that the security levels have been properly changed Touching will return to the Utility Menu screen f the characters entered do not match a password an error message appears will return to the Utility Menu screen e Numerical numbers and alphabets A to F can be used for a password Details about security levels see SW4D5C GOTR PACKE V Operating Manual Drawing Software Manual on screen Touching 3 Procedure To enter a password follow these steps e Touch 0 to 9 and A to F to enter a password e Touch to confirm the password ent
274. o Rx Code Time 1 a 012 00 00 00 00 1 12 00 00 00 00 2 n 012 00 00 00 00 2 mo 012 00 00 00 00 3 aO 012 00 00 00 00 3 o 012 00 00 00 00 4 n 012 00 00 00 00 4 ode 00 00 00 00 5 n 012 00 00 00 00 5 012 00 00 00 00 6 aO 012 00 00 00 00 6 o 012 00 00 00 00 7 n 012 00 00 00 00 7 012 00 00 00 00 8 m 012 00 00 00 00 8 012 00 00 00 00 9 aO 012 00 00 00 00 9 oO 012 00 00 00 00 10 n 012 00 00 00 00 10 ode 00 00 00 00 11 012 00 00 00 00 11 12 00 00 00 00 12 n 012 00 00 00 00 12 O12 00 00 00 00 13 aO 012 00 00 00 00 13 o 012 o0 00 00 00 14 a 012 00 00 00 00 14 01 00 00 00 00 15 n 012 00 00 00 00 15 O12 00 00 00 00 16 aO 012 00 00 00 00 16 o 012 o0 00 00 00 1 2 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The error history is displayed 624 to 687 Axis No of axis on which error occurred 624 628 Code Code for error which occurred decimal 625 629 Time Time at which error occurred 626 630 The warning history is displayed 689 to 752 Axis No of axis on which warning occurred 689 693 Code Code for warning which occurred decimal 690 694 Time Time at which warning occurred 691 695 12 88 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 7 Monitoring the error termporary startup history and startup history SET Gata MONIT END St
275. odule monitor of that module to the screen where it is executed Touch input The keys used for the operation with the System Configuration screen shown in 2 are displayed Touch input 2 Key functions The chart below shows the functions of the keys that are used with the System Configuration screen operation END Key Monitoring ends and display returns to the screen where the special module monitor function was begun Module display Moves to screen where the special module monitor for that module is position executed Slots 0 through 7 are valid for each base module 12 1 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Function Scrolls display up or down one level to display the system configuration of the level number just before or after the one that is currently displayed Operation of these keys is enabled when the system configuration extends to three levels or more 7 Scrolls down one level A Scrolls up one level 12 1 2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions This section describes the structure of the monitor screen that is displayed by specifying the module with the system configuration screen and the key functions that are displayed at the top of the screen 1 Display with A68RD 1 AGARDO Graph Monitor Screen RESET Chg MENU END All types of data are displayed when the SET Data MONIT 600
276. og Star 8 Posit Startedes 8 18 Rev Jog Star 3 Y Posit Starteded 3 19 E v Fud Jog Star A a Battery Error A i v Rev Jog Star B Error DetectiangB B B x M Code OFF E X zero Completeec C aC Y M Code OFF D Y Zero CompleterD D 0 PLC READY E X M Code ON E F Y Code ON JF The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 78 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 22 6 Positioning data monitor The Positioning Data Monitor Screen No 1 is used as an example SET Data MONIT END AD72 A19D71 Positioning Data Monitor Screen No 0 RESET Chg MENU X Address Speed Duell M Code Y Address Speed Duell M Code 001 01234567 01234 012 012 0 001 01234567 01294 012 012 0 002 01254567 01294 012 012 0 002 01234567 01294 012 012 0 01234567 01294 012 012 0 009 01234567 012934 012 012 0 004 01234567 01234 012 012 Q 004 01234567 01234 012 012 005 01234567 01234 012 012 Q 005 01234567 01234 012 012 0 006 01234567 01234 012 012 0 006 01234567 01234 012 012 0 00 01234567 01234 012 012 0 007 01234567 01234 012 012 0 008 01234567 01234 012 012 0 008 01234567 01294 012 012 0 009 01234567 01234 012 012 0 009 01234567 01294 012 012 0 010 01234567 01234 012 012 0 010 01234567 01294 012 012 0 011 01254567 012934 012 012 0 011 041254567 01294
277. oper manuals to understand the handling operation and functions of the GOT unit and SW4D5C GOTR PACKE A985GOT Graphic Operation Terminal User s Manual Hardware e To know the features of A985GOT unit A985GOT e To confirm the specifications of A985GOT unit s EE To know the part names of A985GOT unit Users Manual of the A985GOT Unit Hardware To know how to install and wire A985GOT unit To know the outline dimension drawing of A985GOT unit A975GOT TBA TBD B A970GOT TBA TBD B A970GOT SBA SBD A970GOT LBA LBD A960GOT EBA EBD User s Manual Hardware e To know the features of A97 5GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit A975GOT TBA TBD B e To confirm the specifications of A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit 7755 ma Found in the packing A970GOT SBA SBD f th A975GOT e To know the part names of A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit 4 A970GOT A960GOT H A960GOT EBA EBD unit e To know how to install and wire A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT user s Manual un it gt Hardware To know the outline dimension drawing of A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit A985GOT TBA EU A975GOT TBA EU A970GOT TBA EU A970GOT SBA EU A960GOT EBA EU User s Manual Hardware To know the features of the GOT A900 series EMC directive Low ey gemme in the packing voltage directive compliant unit a ey A985GOT TBA EU TN Nen A975GOT TBA EU e To confirm the specifications of the GOT A900 series EMC directi
278. operation 2 dee ee dence cc dee CE Hu tc 9 12 9 4 2 TC Monitor screen display and key 9 13 9 5 BM Monitor monitor of buffer memory nennen nennen nennen 9 14 9 5 1 Basic 0peratlony scincvs av oder e p even Rd are deren eran ered of ee 9 14 9 5 2 BM Monitor screen display and key functions seen 9 15 9 6 T6Stsve4 avec Aas ee eed eee A Shee eee 9 16 9 6 1 Basic 9 16 9 6 2 Quick teSt TUrTICtion iic tam dtd tee decode ta Lip dee a d Du arde to 9 19 10 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SYSTEM MONITORING 10 1to 10 2 11 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR 11 1to11 2 11 1 Operation procedures before starting special module monitoring 11 1 11 2 Operation procedures from user created monitor screen display to start of special module monitor AO 11 2 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 1 12 114 12 1 Screen configuration common operation and changing screens when monitoring 12 1 12 1 1 Composition of system configuration screen and key
279. or Code 012 Resouut ion Setting 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 6 7 Buffer memory address to reference decimal Contents of display The specified conversion enabled disabled status of each channel is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing sampling processing of each channel is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing of each channel is displayed The values set for the time and number of times for averaging processing of each channel is displayed The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output value of each channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 10 to 13 Resolution selection 2 0 to 8000 3 0 to 12000 The error code is displayed when a writing data error occurs 18 The set resolution selection is displayed 20 2to5 12 24 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 10 2 I O monitor SET Data MONIT ALS64AD Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Chg menu ENO Inputs x Dutputs x WE HOT Error Flag 0 DO 0 1 READY 1 01 1 aM Error Flag 2 D2 Error Reset 03 3 03 8 4 14 D4 14 5 5 05 5 6 6 06 6 7 7 07 7 8 18 08 18 5 5 09 5 A A 0A A B B DB B E E DC E D D DD D E E DE E F LF 1 The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display
280. or position starts Ladder Moves to ladder monitor Screen PLCRD Moves to PLC read Screen Once this data has been read from the PLC it does not need to be read again If data for screens created by the user is downloaded from the computer after this data has been read however the data will have to be read again 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS Operation procedure MELSEC GOT 2 When the MELSEC QnA ladder monitor is executed PI TI TSE SET WORD PLC SP DATA SET SELF MEMOR MON UNIT COPY UP CHECK INFO LADDER TIME CLEAN PASS NET MELSEC Qn LADERMONITOR NO 0 READ ST 0 7 E1E JESIES 4 gt Hwa JEEE Ally JE mm n v PLC NETHORKNo O ST FF RERD SELECTION DRIVE f PLC RAM A B Line 1999 06 10 17 40 C Line 1999 06 10 17 42 D Lin t KENSA Program MONITOR Program KUMITATE Comment HANSOU 1999 06 10 17 43 Moni 1999 06 10 07 21 B Lil MONITOR Comment KENSA Comment 1999 06 10 13 02 C L diu prive 1999 06 10 17 45 A Line n 1999 06 10 17 50 Monit ini e System e or System e To the following page 1 Touch the ladder monitor starting touch switch on the monitor screen prepared by the user or touch the LADDER MON on the utility screen to s
281. ormal SNO Test mode 1 request Ready ON error The set status of the AD70D slide switch is displayed Contents of display Sws SW7 SWe SW5 SW4 SW3 SW2 Swi OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 1 26 SW7 SWe SW5 SW4 ON ON ON ON 25 gt 2 o 2 c 2 c 12 62 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 20 2 Zero return monitor SET Data MONIT 0700 Zero Return Data Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END MmPosit Start eed Position 2 01234567830 Present Value 01234567890 Forward Start Y Reverse Start Actual Position3 01294567890 Iravel Dist 01234567890 BER Fud Jog Start Jog Start rror Counter 4 01234567890 Welocity 012345 PLS s sz el Pos Restart WEN Posit Complete Fero Address 5 01234567890 Jog Velocity 012345 PLS s 1 zero Rtn RequestPero Rtn vel 6 012345 PLS s Torque Limit 012345 Zero Rtn Start Creep Velocitu7 012345 PLS s zero Rtn Comple Motor Speed 012345 Lero Rtn Dist 8 01234567890 BEN Stop Motor Current 012345 BUSY ear Zero Dist 9 01234567890 In post Lo ear Zero Set 10 01234567890 Regen Level 012345 gis Servo OFF P Made 0 0 Pos 1 Vel Max Torque 012345 pl Switchover rogue Control 0 Test Mode 0110110110110110 WOT Error 817654321 Error Detection rode 1 012 2 0123 5 0123 B Switch 0110110110110110
282. ot available for QnACPU The CPU at the list edit destination is Set the PLC number and change the station for Set the PLC No QnACPU access Set the PLC number and change the station for The keyword is not input e The GO key was pressed without input of 9 Set the PLC No the keyword on the keyword input screen list edit Or select the same station and input the keyword The PLC parameter was changed The PLC parameter exceeding the file R 9 Restart the system if required Restart the GOT system register capacity was set The PLC parameter was changed Read the ladder monitor on the PLC again if The capacity of the file R register was set Read the ladder monitor again required The PLC program was edited Read Set the PLC number and change the station for Edit the PLC program the ladder monitor again access 21 3 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT 21 2 Error of PLC CPU When the error step read in other mode is performed the error message and the error step of the current error in the ACPU are displayed Error messages error details and corrective actions are displayed below If an error message appears take the following actions to resume operation 1 Check the error message 2 If the error code is not displayed check the error code of special register D9008 with the system monitor function Refer to Cha
283. ow Unit kilobytes Memory capacity required Memory capacity required Software to be saved when saving to GOT built in when saving to a personal Remarks memory computer hard disk Special module monitor data A68RD3 A616DAV both sides can be monitored AD7OD AD71 S1 S2 S7 A1SJ711D1 ID2 R4 A1S68DAV both sides can be monitored 00 SO Output modue 1 The AD75M1 M2 M3 can be monitored within the monitoring range of the AD75P1 P2 P3 2 The A1SD75M1 M2 M3 can be monitored within the monitoring range of the A1SD75P1 P2 P3 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 3 3 4 Precautions when using the special module monitor function The precautions to follow when using the special module monitor function are discussed below 1 Special function modules that cannot be monitored Modules displayed as special on the system configuration screen cannot be monitored using the special module monitor function To monitor these modules use the system monitor function BM Monitor 2 Display when connecting the small building block type PLC CPU This precaution pertains to a situation where an expansion base unit for a large building block type of setup is connected to a small building block type CPU such as the A1SCPU in a station connected to the GOT In such a case the special function module on the large expansion base unit is displayed on the system configuration screen with the same model name as that of the small buil
284. pecified as 1 CPU A4UCPU PLC COMMUNICATION ERROR 1 Cannot communicate with PLC CPU of the specified network No or station No 2 The specified drive does not exist Check and correct the following 1 Does the specified PLC CPU exist 2 Is it online Data communication status 3 Has an error occurred LOCK ON OTHER MACHINE PLEASE CANSEL File is locked with the peripheral equipment GPPW GPPQ After reading and writing with the peripheral equipment GPPW GPPQ read the file again NOT EXISTING DRIVE DRIVE ERROR 1 The specified drive does not exist 2 The specified drive is faulty 1 Check whether the specified drive exists or not 2 Check whether the specified drive is faulty or not 7 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH LADDER MONITORING MELSEC GOT MEMO 8 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE SYSTEM MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT Chapter8 Operation procedures for the system monitor function The operation procedures for using the system monitor function are explained in this section 8 1 Operation procedures before starting system monitoring This section contains a summary of the procedure for transmitting the system program OS for the system monitor function from the Personal computer to the GOT until it is installed in the built in memory For details please refer to the Help in the drawing software Details of the screen display and
285. peration carry on the key input 20 6 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 2 Basic operation of list edit This section describes basic operations of list edit with simple operation examples 20 2 1 Reading sequence program The sequence program is read to check its content Operation example 1 READ Select the Read mode 2 SET 0 gt GO X0000 Read the Oth step Y0010 X0001 Y0010 Q Scroll the screen with the GO key 20 7 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 2 2 Changing overwriting command The following example shows the changing procedure of the sequence program Before change f 3 OUT Y010 X000 x001 s Ht V YO10 Change the timer setting 7 value from K10 to K100 After change f 3 OUT Y010 4 OUT TO K100 Change the timer setting value from K10 to K100 Operation example SHIFT WRITE Select the Write mode 2 SET GO Read the 4th step that changes the setting value 3 14 160 Move the cursor to setting value K10 of TO 4 K The setting value of timer TO was changed from K10 to K100 20 8 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 2 3 Adding inserting command The following example shows the procedure of adding the command to the seq
286. played 0to37 300 to 337 12 74 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 22 2 Zero return monitor SET Data MONIT 8D72 819D71 Zero Retu Che MENU END rn Data Monitor Screen X Axis Zero Data 110110110110110 ERE Sail he ie ee Posit Start Exec Data No 012 Pt 01 012 Pt 01 P silt B roses Posit Compl Present Value 0123456789 0123456789 0 Y Axis Zero Data Zero Request Change value M 123456789 0123456789 01101101 ZERO SElgpb A VER eerie aaa oa zero Complete zero Address 123456189 0123456789 0 PG Zero Point Fud Jog Start 0 dyp agensar mrk Mech Stop Rev Jog Start Output Speed 9 01234567 01234567 0 Fwd 1 Rev Stop e 0 Stop Time Dut speed Limit 9 012345671 01234567 1 Stop Signal ay Pos Started oon t 0 SAE A RESSA S RAE HEA BUSY Speed Change 0 code ON pr precem EE In position Zeroing Speed o 234567 01234567 Excessive EPD M ADeMMe eeMee s Creep Speed Torque Limit X Bxis 012 Y Axis 012 zero Duell Time X Axis 012 Y Axis 012 MCode ErrCodel 012 01 012 01 2 13 14 Buffer memory address Conten
287. played on the network monitor of the A95 GOT but they cannot be selected If the GOT is connected to the PLC CPU without clock function items are displayed on the clock window but they cannot be selected 4 On screen error messages Message Cause Corrective Action Can t be selected e The OS is not installed on the GOT e Install the OS When system monitor The memory board is not installed Install the memory board special module in the A985 97 960GOT in the A985 97 960GOT monitor ladder The A95 GOT other than the Use the compatible model monitor or clock setting compatible model A95 GOT BD A95 GOT BD M3 is selected M3 is used Replace the CPU with The GOT is connected to a PLC one with a clock function CPU without a clock function or do not use the clock setting 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 4 4 Copying the monitor data OS data between the internal memory and memory card Screen amp OS copy 1 Display screen Sample screen MONITOR INNER MEMORY MEMORY CARD MONITOR INNER MEMORY lt MEMORY CARD 05 INNER MEMORY MEMORY CARD T SEL NI 2 Features Project data stored in the internal memory can be saved to the memory card Project data stored in the memory card can be saved to the internal memory OS data can be backed up by copying them from the internal memory to the memory card 3 Procedure a Bas
288. pplicable for A FX ladder monitor internal memory extension 2MB Option function applicable for A FX ladder monitor internal memory extension 4MB Option function applicable for A FX ladder monitor internal memory extension 8MB monitor internal memory extension 4MB monitor internal memory extension 8MB 2 For information about the PLC on which to install and use drawing software and the cable to be connected between the PLC and the GOT see SW4D5C GOTR PACKE V Operating Manual 2 1 2 BEFORE BEGINNING OPERATION MELSEC GOT MEMO 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT Chapter3 Specifications In this chapter the specifications of the ladder monitor function system monitor function special module monitor function and list editor function are discussed separately 3 1 Ladder monitor function specifications ESI POINTS e When the ladder monitor function is used on the A985 97 960GOT the memory board applicable for the PLC CPU at the monitoring destination The ladder monitor function cannot be used on the A95 GOT 3 1 1 PLC CPUs to be monitored The PLC CPUs that allow ladder monitoring are the QCPU A Mode QnACPU ACPU FXCPU and motion controller CPU For details refer to Section 1 2 2 Ladder monitoring is not available for sub programs 2 and 3 of AAUCPU when connected to the computer link 3 1 2 Access ranges to be monitored For access range for the ladder monitor function se
289. pter 8 3 Remove the cause of the error Display Example of display for an error in the CPU other than AnA and AnU Mode is displayed other mode 0 ERR STEP 25 Error step number is displayed SP UNIT DOWN step number of D9010 ERR CODE 4 1 Error message is displayed Error code is displayed error code of D9008 Example of display for an error in the AnA or ANUCPU Mode is displayed other mode 0 ERR STER 25 t Error step number is displayed E UN e H E OWN TM F _ step number of 09010 is displayed ERR AE OE rror message is displaye ML Error code is displayed error code of D9008 Error detail code is displayed error code of D9091 Error history if available is displayed Example of next display for the display of above error history is available Mode is displayed other mode Error history number is displayed history control No of ACPU Error step number is displayed Error message is displayed Error code is displayed Error detail code is displayed Second minute hour date month and year of the error are displayed Displayed if other error history is available When an error message of the PLC CPU appears refer to the ACPU programming manual Common Command and the user s manual for each CPU for corrective actions 21 4 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTI
290. r 012 4 18 15 i 3 a Dr selection or LEA La Limiter Lower 012 4 X ru 01 34 A 01 34 Alert occurrence flag W 19 Normal Graph PV SV m 2000 0 8000 16 17 Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference hexadecimal Pon De poe a The type of the thermocouple connected to each channel is displayed The temperature measurement unit set for each channel is displayed The decimal position information of the temperature measurement value goal value and warning setting value for the input range and temperature measurement unit setting are displayed Display When reading from PLC CPU When writing from PLC CPU When 0 Use the data from buffer Write the value to be specified memory as is directly as is Use the 1 10th of the data read Write the value to be specified When 1 as actual value as 10 times the value The measured temperature PV value detected for each channel is displayed In the decimal point position 0 column the value of the detected measured temperature is displayed as is In the decimal point position 1 column the value 1 10th of the detected measured temperature is displayed The goal value SV value set for each channel is displayed In the decimal point position 0 column the value of the set goal value is displayed as is In the decimal point position 1 column the 1 10th of the set goal value is displayed The PID calcula
291. r menu Starts change of current values for buffer memory of special function module displayed on screen Starts test set reset for I O signal between PLC CPU and special function module 12 2 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 1 3 Setting method for remote station monitoring The setting method to perform remote station monitoring during special module monitoring is described below Special Module Monitor When connected to MELSECNET System Configuration NETWK No 0 PLC STATION FF NEL No Touch SP UNIT to display the system configuration screen Depending on the connection method the screen first displayed will be different as indicated below Bus connection and CPU direct The base of the connection station connection is displayed MELSECNET II B connection No system configuration display MELSECNET 10 connection No system configuration display for MELSECNET connections the following operations will always be required 1 Touch to display the window shown in 2 2 Touch Alphanumeric to specify the network No and PLC station No Alphanumeric Enter the network No and PLC station No 4 IUE Select the input area Set the area value In the case of data link systems In the case of network systems NETWK NO STATION 0 0 NETWK NO 0 Host loop FF Host 1 to 255
292. r Data Monitor Screen RESET Che menu END Mab Posit Start2 Feed Position 01234567890 Present Value 01234567990 13 E Forward Start Reverse Start 3 Actual Position 01234567890 Travel Dist 01234567830 I 14 Y Fud Jog Start Rev Jog Start 4 Error Counter 041294567890 Velocity 012345 PLS s 15 e Vel Pos Restart MENPOsit Complete5 Pos Address P1 01234567890 Jog Velocity 012345 PLS s I 16 1 Zero Rtn Reques6 Pos Address P2 01234567890 Upper Limit 01234567890 17 aero Rtn Start ower Limit 01234567890 18 Zero Rtn Comple7 Pos Velocity 1 012345 PLS s Gear Ratio 0123 0123 19 8 Pos velocity V2 012345 PLS s elocitu Limit 012345 PLS s 20 9 Pos Pattern 0 ccel Time 0123 ms I 21 MH V P Switchover YZP Mode 0 ecel Time 0123 ms 22 0 Positioning HDT Error 10 1 Velocity Tn Position Range 0123 23 Excessive Error Error Detection Error Code 1 012 2 O12 Positioning 24 Buffer memory address No f coments Sp to reference decimal The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 2 The calculated command pulse number PLS based on the command value 100 101 is displayed The actual amount of servo movement feedback pulse number PLS 3 He 102 103 calculated from the feedback pulse is displayed The difference between the command pulse number x CMS CDV and
293. r Error 012345 012345 012345 012945 012945 012945 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 012345 10 tin C mel wel wed d EL oooooooo oo co 2 mmuocmzTo now oooooooo Over Under Error Buffer memory address to referende hexadecimal Contents of display The set D A conversion enabled disabled status for each channel is displayed The set analog output enabled disabled status for each channel is displayed The current input value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital input value of each channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 When the digital input value for any channel is set to 4096 or higher 1 is displayed in the over error column For A616DAI When the digital input value for any channel is set as a negative number 1 is displayed in the under error column For A616DAV When the digital input value for any channel is set to 4097 or less 1 is displayed in the under error column 10 to 1F 30 to 3F 30 to 3F 12 47 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 17 2 I O monitor SET Data MONIT A616DAI Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Chg menu ENO HOT Error READY Error ix Dutputs DJ Dutput Enable nmo C3 CB 5 1 0 0l ca TT EA C3 0D IP COD 4 Cn CHI
294. r Screen RESET Che END Input X 0 0 50 100 50 100 Channel 0 Channel 1 Scale A 0 Channel 2 Data Format 0 Channel 3 Scale B 0 Channel 4 Data Format 1 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel A Channel B Channel C B 07 Error Channel D 2 Channel E B crror Channel F FEDCBA9S 76543210 Format 0110110110110110 Enable 0110110110110110 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Buffer memory address to Contents of display Y reference hexadecimal The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output XP 30 to 3F value of each channel is Eee ee nae HW UTE PI ND CMT as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 A I is is displayed when watchdog timererroroccurs when watchdog timer error occurs A E is displayed when an error occurs a The set status of the data format for each channel is displayed p 435 3 The specified conversion enabled disabled status of each channel is F displayed 12 45 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 16 5 Graph monitor connect No 0 to connect No 7 when multiplex module is used 1 SET Data MONIT amp 6158D Graph Monitor Screen CONNECT No 0 RESET Che END Input X 0 0 50 100 50 100 Channel 0 Channel 1 Scale 0 Channel 2 Data Format 0 Channel 3 Scale B Q Channel 4 Data Format 1 Channel 5 2 Channe
295. r memory address to reference decimal Contents of display 1 The number of the program being used is displayed 11 The output status of each channel is displayed 4 2 The specified status for the Output Enable command of each channel is 10 displayed 3 The measured distance value for the distance detection function is displayed 5 6 4 The rotation speed of the resolver connected to A61LS is displayed 3 5 The set value of the target address for the positioning function is displayed 12 6 The compensation value for the zero point compensation function is 7 displayed 7 The current value of the resolver after compensation by the zero point 0 compensation function is displayed 8 The error code is displayed when an error occurs 8 When an A61LS resolver underflow is detected 1 is displayed 2 9 When an A61LS resolver overflows is detected 1 is displayed 1 When a low battery charge is detected 1 is displayed 9 10 The set values A and B for executing the positioning function are displayed 13 to 44 for each channel 12 8 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 2 2 I O monitor SET Data MONIT 861LS Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Chg menu ENO PLC READY Pasit Start a Limit Func start MS Overflow Reset a Underflou Reset Error Reset Inputs x NN WOT Error 10 Online 11 Overt low
296. r screen 1 Display screen The display screen differs with the GOT used GOT Screen Example Used P BUZZER VOLUME NONE SHORT LONG OUTSIDE SPEAKER OFF ON SCREEN SAVE TIME 00 MIN 0 FREE SCREEN SAVE LIGHT OFF ON LANGUAGE AAS EINGLISH A97 GOT MICRO Baud rate 4800 9600 19200 A960GOT MICRO COM FORM FORM 1 FORM 2 T lt SELECT CHANGE HUMAN SENSER Invalid Effective OUTSIDE SPEAKER da ON SENSER DETECT 10 10 SCREEN SAVE TIME 0 MIN 0 FREE SENSER OFF DELAY OO MIN 10 SEC SCREEN SAVE LIGHT OFF LANGUAGE E QBUS STAGE No S A985GOT QBUS SLOT No sLOT 0 9 T SELECT CHANGE Page 2 2 T 1 SELECT CHANGE SCREEN SAVE TIME 0 2 MIN O FREE EBENEN acrio SCREEN SAVE LIGHT OFF LANGUAGE H REVERS DISPLAY NO A95 GOT Page 1 2 T lt SELECT CHANGE Page 2 2 T lt SELECT CHANGE This screen example assumes that the communication driver other than Computer Bus Q AJ71QC24 YASUKAWA GL CP9200 SH H and SIEMENS S 300 400 has been installed The grip switch setting and grip switch cancel time key OFF setting are available only for use of the A950 handy GOT 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 2 Functions e Buzzer volume You can select the length of the beep sound Factory set to SHORT Outside speaker sound You can select whe
297. re e ag on Pre ee 12 52 12 18 4 Setting monitor when A60MXT is used 12 53 12 18 5 Temperature monitor connect No 0 to connect No 7 when A60MXT is 12 54 12 18 6 Graph monitor INPUT O F sssssssssseseseeseeenee nennen tnnt 12 55 12 18 7 Graph monitor connect No 0 to connect No 7 when multiplex module is used 12 56 AD70 A1SD70 modu le monitor eii eite adici rt oen nare tanen ore ev e end 12 57 12 19 1 Positioning and parameter data monitor ss 12 57 1219 2 Zero return monitor pecie cit dee deett ce dne cot dre cio dp de 12 59 12 19 83 WO MORnILOL iiie eth eed eet e de a eat ts 12 60 A70D module motltor 2 IE ER Ie e PEU I EP PRU Ue 12 61 12 201 Positioning MOO erro rro er rete ee A d en 12 61 12 20 2 Zero ret rn monitor inae EB redeo dos 12 63 12 20 3 Parameter data monitor sss nennen 12 65 12 20 4 VO MONIO reet ete het t e pe n e eet 12 67 AD71 Module monitor 12 68 12 2 1 Positioning cocco rece eT bene ce eb 12 68 12 21 2 Zero retur monitor ette dp etie 12 69 12 21 3 Parameter data rakai ea nennen nennen 12
298. red in decimal or hexadecimal format 2 Device comment display When the PLC CPU device is monitored the comments written into the PLC CPU are displayed 4 Other stations can be monitored Other stations in data link systems network systems or CC Link systems including the GOT or stations connected to the GOT can be monitored 1 11 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT 1 3 4 Features of the special module monitor function Installing or downloading the special module monitor function operating system and special module monitor data into the GOT built in memory using the drawing software enables monitoring and changing of data in the special function module buffer memory using dedicated screens Signal statuses of I O modules can also be monitored The features of the special module monitor function are shown below 1 Monitoring can be done with dedicated screens see Section 12 2 for details Monitoring is carried out using dedicated screens provided by the manufacturer for the special function module and I O module It is not necessary for the user to create monitor screens Sample display 1 for special function module Menu screen after module Monitor screen after menu selection selection Graph monitor screen 7654321 0000000000000000 Mei gee 1 Operation Monitor T 2 VO Monitor Menu w 3 Graph Monitor ra Er 000000000000000 eos selection
299. rograms Clearing of all device memories Set the PLC No of other stations for access on the MELSECNET II B or MELSECNET 10 PLC No setting Select the main sub Main sub program switching program displayed on the list edit screen Operate the run stop status of the ACPU from the GOT Remote run stop Specify the memory address absolute address of the ACPU Read the memory details and write the machine language to the memory Read write of machine language Except AnA AnUCPU AnA AnUCPU Step number gt Top I O number of unit ie Buffer memory address gt PC No GO Network Station No SHIFT gt OTHER Address hexadecimal Address GO Machine hexadecimal 20 16 language code
300. rs When the A60MXT is used I is displayed when a temperature was input that exceeds the temperature range set according to the digital output value Set for each channel When the A60MXT is used is displayed when a temperature was input that exceeds the measurement temperature range set for the measurement range of each channel The set status of the data format for each channel is displayed The specified conversion enabled disabled status for each channel is displayed 12 55 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 18 7 Graph monitor connect No 0 to connect No 7 when multiplex module is used 1 SET Data MONIT amp 6186TD Graph Monitor Screen CONNECT No 0 RESET Che END Input Status X 0 0 50 100 50 100 Temperature Channel 0 Value C Channel 1 01 0123 5 8 0123 5 Channel 2 0129 5 9 0129 5 Channel 3 2 0123 5 A 0123 5 Channel 4 3 0123 5 0123 5 3 2 Channel 5 4 0123 5 0 0123 5 Channel 6 5 0123 5 D 0123 5 Channel 7 amp 0123 5 E 0123 5 Channel 8 7 0123 5 F 0123 5 Channel 9 Channel Channel B B Error 4 Channel C Channel D izital Val Err Channel E Ben val Err Channel F Channel Ma FEDCBRSB 5543210 Data Format 0110110110110110 Conversion 0110110110110110 0 Scale A 0 1 Scale B 0 Enable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled 5 Buff
301. s Top number of S m Top number of M gt GO gt 2 Top device for storage of setting values GO No of counters gt Top number of timer 2 Top device for storage of setting values A 4 Top number of latch GO number of latch gt GO END Setting for multiple items is also available 20 15 gt CLEAR gt X End of writing is displayed gt GO 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST 20 3 7 Operation in Other modes O MELSEC GOT Procedures key input sequence Operation that checks the error step number error code for the current error in the ACPU other than AnA and AnUCPU Check the program double coil command code END commana Error check Program check Buffer memory batch monitoring Monitor the buffer memory details of the special function unit Clock monitor Monitor the clock data of the ACPU Clear all memories in the Clearing of all PC memories 9 ACPU Clear all sequence program microcomputer program and T C setting value areas Clear all details of the bit device and the word device in the ACPU Clearing of all p
302. s the program Main Sub currently selected Sd Device ET EN Clears all device memories except for special D special M and R PC No PC No setup Switches the target ACPU in GOT operations in each mode Switch Switches the target program Main Sub in GOT operations in each mode oo Remote RUN STOP Forcibly changes the ACPU running status between RUN and STOP read write machine language 3 18 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT Chapter4 Operating the utility function 4 1 Utility function table Brightness contr Adjusting the brightness contrast of a monitor This function changes with the GOT used Section 4 3 ast adjustment Screen 7 AE This function can be executed only after installing System monitor Monitoring or changing devices in a PLC CPU an OS on the GOT by using drawing software Chapter 9 This function can be executed only when the GOT memory is extended and the OS is installed from Chapter 12 the drawing software to the GOT Refer to the HELP function of SW4D5C GOTR PACKE to install the OS from memory card to Section 4 4 internal memory Special module Monitoring or changing buffer memory of a monitor special module Copying of screen data between internal Screen amp OS memory and memory card copy Copying of OS data between internal memory and memory card The options of settings include Language used in a message display Japanese English Buzzer sound adjustment Sou
303. sampling processing of each channel is displayed 2 3 The specified status for the averaging processing of each channel 2 Time count is displayed The A D Conversion Complete flag status for each channel is displayed The values set for the time and count of times for averaging processing of 1010 17 The current output value a value between 0 to 2000 for the digital output value of each channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 The error code is displayed when a writing data error occurs 20 to 27 each channel is displayed 12 30 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 12 2 I O monitor SET Data MONIT A1S6BAD Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Chg ENO x y WOT Error 10 0 10 1 Ready 1 1 1 Error Detect zZ zZ Error Reset 3 13 3 13 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 7 7 E 8 8 8 8 E E E E A A A A B B B B D D D D E E E E F F F F Contents of display The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 31 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 12 3 Graph monitor SET Data MONIT A1S68AD Graph Monitor Screen RESET Che END Input 0 5 0 100 CH 1 CH 2 HIER CH 3 CH 4 1 px R ss CH 5 CH 6 CH 7 C
304. screen and returns to the previous monitor screen where the network monitor function was executed 17 13 17 USING THE NETWORK MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 17 3 4 Display contents and keys functions other station parameter status monitor This section describes the other station parameter status monitor screen and the function of on screen keys 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT Display example e el Revorsing part is P Reversing part is connecting station H an abnormal station No Contents of Display Station numbers are shown up to the maximum number of linked stations Any station whose parameters are monitored is highlighted on screen Any station that stays in an abnormal condition is highlighted on screen A station specified as a reserved station is treated as a station that stays in a normal condition Not highlighted when connected to MELSECNET B or MELSECNET 1 master station 2 Key Functions The table below shows the function of keys that are used on the other station parameter status monitor screen
305. sed The display details are the same a as the ones on the A985 97 a 960GOT f MELSECNETA0 equ Soe cue Touch F button to change the i display s IntPLC Net R I Eg tren MELSECNET 10 ul Il MELSECNET 2 o 64StaLocSt OSta RmtSta clan one 3 Sta MstSta NETWK No 1 pe NETHK No 255 Rmt lO Net SIA wan jax 20ms sy IntPC Net H Contents of Display 1 This shows the action mode of the own station On line Off line loop test 2 This shows the status of the F loop primary loop OK NG This shows the status of the R loop secondary loop OK NG This shows whether the loopback was executed or not Executed Not executed This shows link scan time required for the control station and the ordinary station for the remote master station and the remote I O station and for the mater station and all the sub stations a Maximum the maximum value of link scan time b Minimum the minimum value of link scan time c Current the current value of link scan time 2 This shows the network category network number and station number This shows the loop status of a network system as follows Primary loop F Secondary loop R a Primary loop OK b Primary loop OK c Primary loop NG Secondary loop OK Secondary loop NG Secondary loop OK 3 4 5
306. sensor detection signal No detection Human sensor operator motion Activation Screen saver status Deactivation Operator approached Operator moved away 1 Motion that the Human sensor cannot detect outside the range or too low moving speed 2 Detection error of Human sensor approx 0 5 sec delay due to Human sensor detection sensitivity 3 Human sensor OFF delay time communication processing time 4 Time when screen saver is being deactivated 5 Human sensor OFF delay setting is required since the Human sensor outputs Detection and No detection alternately 6 Human sensor OFF delay screen save time 4 OPERATING THE UTILITY FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 3 Operation a Basic operation e Touch or 4 to select the necessary item When the A985GOT A950 handy GOT is used select the last item on Page 1 2 and touch 4 to show Page 2 2 For the setting item whose value will be changed highlight the digit to be set by touching and set the value by touching If you are going to select another setting item after that return the highlight to the setting item by touching and make selection by touching Jor EM e After setting touch 3 After touching 2 the GOT is automatically reset and the monitor screen appears b Return to each screen f no change has been made to the Setup settings touching E returns to the utility menu screen If any
307. sequence program from the PLC CPU See Sec 6 1 1 Specify the PLC CPU for the ladder monitor and the program to be read The PC program is read Display the ladder monitor screen When you touch the circuit monitor starts See Sec 6 2 Touch PLCRD 1 Touch Menu R lead the sequence program that is See Sec 6 12 displayed on the ladder monitor screen 1 With the drawing software touch the key where the touch switch expanded function is set and start the circuit monitor function When the Utility screen is displayed start the circuit monitor function by touching LADDER 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT Chapter6 Operating the various ladder monitor screens The following sections describe each screen operation when using the ladder monitor function 6 1 Screen operation and screen changes when monitoring This section includes an explanation of the PLC read operation that reads out the sequence program from the PLC CPU when executing the ladder monitor the ladder read operation that specifies the sequence program to be displayed on the ladder monitor screen and the screen movement when executing the ladder monitor D 6 1 1 Reading data from the PLC The operation of reading the sequence program for the ladder monitor from the PLC CPU is described below The operation procedures vary depending on the
308. set value is output as an analog value 1 The analog value following D A conversion is output A B is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs A I is displayed when an error occurs in a module on the various channels 12 110 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 27 A1S64TCTT BW S1 and A1S64TCRT BW S1 module monitor 12 27 1 Operation monitor Fan 2218 mH ifs R1S64TCTT RT S1 Operation Monitor Screen ALL CH RESET Chg MENU 1 range R Hre5 26 JPt100 Decimal 1 i 012345 012345 012345 012345 4 process BOT ue EN CUR UIN ESI UAE RE ROR BE eR value Decimal point 1 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 Dem 012345 012345 5 Set value Point 0 012945 Ios a EN s ERR setting Decimal point 1 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 0123 5 0 100 6 Manipulation value MV 7 gms occurrence flag a a B 8 Write error flag Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference hexadecimal The type of the thermocouple connected to each channel is displayed The temperature measurement unit set for each channel is displayed The decimal position information of the temperature measurement value goal value and warning setting value for the input range and temperature measurement unit setting are displayed Display When reading from PLC CPU When writing from PLC CPU Use the data from buffer Write the value to b
309. set values cannot be monitored if the software version of the ABGT J61BT13 used is version W or earlier 5 Can t change V or Z current values 6 Cannot be monitored if the software version of the ABGT J61BT13 used is version W or earlier 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC GOT b Connection with QnACPU or ACPU QnACPU 11 ACPU Ld Ref Computer MELSEC di Computer MELSEC i Functions Section ection adea link NET Tires n xig link m 9010 connection connection COMER ection connechon connection connection Brightness Adjusting the brightness contrast Section contrast of a monitor screen 4 3 adjustment Message display Selecting a message display icd selection Screen amp Copying the screen on OS data OS copy between the internal memory and memory card Setu Setting a use environment of the P GOT 4 5 Running diagnostic checks on Section mn GOT hardware 4 6 Memory GOT memory Section information 4 7 Setting the clock the clock Setting clock 8800 Screen Displaying the display area wre cleanup cleanup screen Defining a password for limited 5227 Password access to the utility menu screen 4 10 Ladder Sequence program monitoring Section monitor using ladder signals 6 2 1 Decimal and hexadecimal display Display of word device values Section switching 6 2 3 Device comment display changing P 24 Section Entry Monitoring of current values by monitor pre regist
310. side is valid until the mode key and the control key are input For details of each key refer to 3 5 4 20 1 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 1 2 Command input procedures Command input procedures can be classified as follows 1 Input the command key to use the command on the key 2 Input the alphanumeric keys corresponding to each character of command sequentially 3 Select and input the command to be used from the Help function Command input procedures for 1 and 2 above are as follows For command input procedure 3 from the Help function refer to 20 2 5 When the command is input the input details are displayed at the 4th line the bottom line on the display In the following description the input of SP key may be omitted when a blank space between the input command and the cursor position is automatically inserted Refer to the example in each description 1 For command code only 1 When the command available on the keyboard is input Command GO Ex When END is input 1 1 1 1 1 1 11 2 When the command not available on the keyboard is input Ex When FOR K5 is input Y0022 1 anno ono 2220 SET P F o Hf R P SP k 5 f GO gt ooxo opa v zz 20 2 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MEL
311. ss 12 104 12 25 1 Action monitor CH 1 and 2 12 104 112 25 2 I O monitoD e ce nats eat Sve pretii antt entiende 12 105 12 25 3 Monitoring set information emen 12 106 12 26 A84AD module monitor sse nennen nennen nnne nnne nnne 12 107 12 26 1 Action monitor cecidi ce treed cust dee ederent cust 12 107 12 26 2 Setting monitor eth f ed n rt edd 12 108 12 26 37 WO mofillOrs eio eri eate ear Pee Du Eat Ue eo iab iius 12 109 12 26 4 Monitoring Qrapns ee eee 12 110 12 27 A1S64TCTT BW S1 A1S64TCRT BW S1 module monitor 12 111 1227A Operation mohitOr sec ave his BSA avn ce t a ee a 12 111 12 27 2 Alert detail monitor nennen 12 112 12 27 3 Operation monitor CH1 to CHA 12 113 OPERATING I O MODULE MONITOR 13 1to 13 2 13 1 Specifying the module to be 0 22 22 22 2 13 1 13 2 Monitor screen configuration and key functions 13 2 ERROR DISPLAY AND HANDLING WITH SPECIAL MODULE MONITORING esee 14 1to 14 2 OPERATING THE NETWORK MONITOR FUNCTION 15 110 15 2 15
312. ss 817 917 1017 O Speed control in progress positioning is in progress in another control method or operation method such as jogging This displays whether control switching in response to an external signal is effective or not in speed position changing 4 control 1163 1213 1263 1 Switching is permitted 0 Switching is not permitted The ON OFF status flag during speed control the flag indicating the control status is displayed The status of Bit 0 of the pertinent buffer memory is displayed 5 Speed control in progress 817 917 1017 O Position control in progress positioning is in progress in another control method or operation method such as jogging 12 91 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 23 9 Monitoring special startup jogging and manual pulser operation SET Data MONIT END AD75P SP Start JOG MPG Drive RESET chg MENU Spacial Star ee Operation Information Parameter Data 1 012 i 01 H i 012 i 0123 1 2 012 01 H 012 0123 012 01 H 012 0123 108 amp MPG en d SIL Bxisi axis axis 4107 5 mm min i 2 012345678 i 012345678 i 012345678 PLS sec 3 HPG Magnify 012 012 012 4 MPG Enabled O Disable 1 Enable Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference decimal The information for the special startup currently in progress is displayed Operation
313. t Completed cop oo nmnwverage sample Time Count 5 0123 5 0123 567 01234 8765439216 75654321 0110110110110110 6 0123 5 0123 567 01234 6 1 Averaging 0 Sampling 7 1 Time Average 0 Count Average 567 disconn W CHS disconn W CH2 disconn disconn Temp Sensor Type CH3 disconn W CH disconn O New JIS DIN 1 019 JIS CH4 disconn CHE disconn WHDT Error WEtrror 012345 9 10 Buffer memory address No Contents of displ ss to reference decimal 1 The temperature detection value of each channel is displayed up to 1 digit 1010 17 after the decimal point The temperature detection value of each channel is displayed up to 3 digits 2 i 18 to 33 after the decimal point The values set for the time and count of times for averaging processing of 2109 each channel is displayed The specified conversion enabled disabled status of each channel is displayed each channel is displayed displayed A I is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs A B is displayed when a writing data error occurs the channel where it occurred and the error code are displayed The specified status of the platinum temperature sensor that is used is 36 displayed For A68RD3 1 A is displayed a channel where a broken wire was detected 8 9 0 For A68RD4 A E
314. t GOT to Personal computer v Start up GOT It is not necessary to set up and operate the GOT after startup y Start up Personal computer to start drawing software With the drawing software transmit the Transmit the data using the installation dialog box system program OS for the ladder monitor function from the Personal computer to the GOT and install it in the built in memory Y When installation is finished the ladder When installation is finished Completed is displayed monitor can be operated through the GOT on the installation dialog box y The drawing software operation is finished je Proceed to Section 5 2 to operate the screen monitor y End 5 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LADDER MONITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 5 2 Operation procedures from display of user created monitor screen to start of ladder monitoring This section shows the operation procedures for the GOT when starting each operation of the ladder monitor function after the ladder monitor function system program OS has been installed in the GOT built in memory The memory board applicable for the PLC CPU at the monitoring destination is installed on the GOT Start up GOT Display the user created monitor screen Start the ladder monitor function 1 When not reading the sequence program from the PLC CPU Display the PLC read screen 4 When reading the
315. t caused M111 to be turned OFF tje A search for another defect is repeated 6 11 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 2 When two occurrences of the search device are found If two occurrences of the search device are found as a result of the search the search will be completed and a message appears telling that the defect search is interrupted Example After searching for Device M120 that is in the OFF state M669 and X0025 will be displayed as devices that caused a failure se wax After searching for Coil M120 that is in the OFF state M669 and g X0025 are displayed as devices that are not conductive Example aos After searching for a device that is in the ON state devices that are conductive are displayed The entire field of the device name and number is highlighted on screen Example MAXA Screen MENU To restart the defect search touch Menu and then select Fact Sea from among options that appears on screen Select either of Contact M669 or X0025 and start the defect search again 3 To use the defect search follow the instructions described below a If a B contact is found defective as a result of the defect search a search for the cause of the ON OFF state will be automatically switched b The monitoring of device data will be rest
316. t check 20 12 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 3 Operation procedure list of list edit 20 3 1 Common operation Procedures key input sequence Input of keyword Input when the keyword is K d GO wor at start up registered in the ACPU Oyo Mode selection Switching of valid key Basic READ PARAM SHIFT Mode key WRITE DELETE OTHERS Select the mode Switch the valid key function indicated at the upper lower part of the key by a user operation Action for Perform the operation for Mode key or SHIFT Mode ke incorrect input incorrect key input ED yor SHIT Operation of command help function Perform program display HELP 1 Input the capital letter Perform operation with the operation in the Write Insert mode of the command Help function command este Input the capital Input the corresponding GO specification letter of the command number Display of Display the comment Perform program display operation HELP Comment stored in the ACPU in the Write Read Insert Delete mode Command code Input the command code P Command gt GO only only Command input operation Other tha
317. tart the ladder monitor function If ROM BIOS is not installed an error message is displayed Touch the END button and install the ROM BIOS H version or later 2 The key window is displayed Set the network No station No of the applicable PLC CPU with the following keys 4 AC DEL Alphanumeric Select the input area Input the network No and the station No Clear all input data to the applicable area Clear one character at the cursor position Define the input Designate the network No and the station No of the applicable PLC CPU For CC Link system Network No Station No Network No Station No 0 mask station For network system 1 to 255 self loop 1 to 64 control station 1 to 64 normal station 3 The PLC read screen appears First touch the Set Up key to display the setting window 6 OPERATING THE VARIOUS LADDER MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT From the previous page 4 The setting Make the setting for initial ladder monitor start Touching the MEMORY key changes the setting choice as indicated below Time Title Type MELSECNET 10 Program No 10 10 A Line 10 17 37 B Line 10 17 40 C Line 1 Program 2184 1999 06 10 Program 2148 19 KAKOU KUMITATE Program 2184 1999 HANSOU Program 3108 1999 KENSA Program 2184 1999 06 10 17 42 D Lin
318. tation ordinary Station This section describes the contents of the detailed own station monitor screen and the function of on screen keys All these are displayed and used when the own station acts as the control station ordinary station on the MELSECNET 10 1 Display contents When the A985 97 960GOT is used When the A95 GOT is used The display details are the same as the ones on the A985 97 960GOT Touch 5 button to change the m reo con HEN z Display example iode Ee None UE Param Total of L Sta Transmission Mode Normal Trans Transmission Stat Normal Trans Largest DL Sta Com Status ink in prog Cause of Ssp Cause of Stop Section Contents of Display This Station s Indicates the station number of the own station e Network Indicates the network number Group Indicates the group number TsSt Info Spc Ctrl Sta Indicates the station number of a station that is specified as a control station Curr Ctrl Sta Indicates the station number of a station that is currently acting as the control station Com Info Indicates whether the own station is communicating with the control station or the sub control station SubCtrl Sta Com Indicates the availability of a sub control station Available None Rmt I O Mst Sta Indicates the station number of a remote I O master station in Block 1 or Block 2 If the master station is not ava
319. ted values 5 0 to 105 0 of the temperature values read from the thermocouple of each is displayed in the graph 12 113 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT Buffer memory address Contents of display to reference hexadecimal The ratio range P which is set in the PID constant setting of each channel is displayed When 0 the 2 position control is set The integral time I set in the PID constant setting of each channel is displayed The derivative time D set in the PID constant setting of each channel is displayed When 0 the PI control is set A I is displayed when out of range data is stored in the temperature adjustment module buffer memory The buffer memory address for which an error was detected during the performance of a write to the temperature adjustment module buffer memory is displayed The details of the error detected during the performance of a write to the temperature adjustment module buffer memory is displayed Thet t for which the warning alarms 1 to 4 set for each MA dica iR 26 to 29 46 to 49 661069 861089 channel turns on are displayed The warning mode of warning alarm 1 to 4 set for each channel are displayed The current sensors connected to each channel are displayed 0 When using CTL 12 S36 8 1 When using CTL 6 P When using A1S64TCRTBW S1 or A1S64TCTTBW S1 The heater currents detected for each channel are display
320. ter Capacity over exceeded the capacity of the memory cassette Set the parameter within the capacity of the memory cassette Write the END command at the last step of the program Restart the list editor function If communication When the list editor function is started is not made properly check the following PLC communication error proper communication with the PLC is not GOT main unit made Connection of the cable CPU main unit if any error has occurred No END command There is no END command Check the setting of RAM ROM e Correct writing was not made the Write or e Check the RAM mounting PC write error s Insert mode e Check the setting of the memory protect switch in the CPU Bde rna Writing insertion or deletion was attempted e Stop the CPU during running of the CPU P Change the PLC number and set the station for PC No error The PLC number is set to other station 9 access to the host 21 2 21 ERROR DISPLAY AND CORRECTIVE ACTIONS FOR LIST EDIT MELSEC GOT Display condition The value exceeding the range of the Reduce the program capacity by steps for KS over rogram capacity by K steps was Pd Rd P setting attempted to be set The value exceeding the range of the file The value exceeding the range of the file KP over register capacity by points was register capacity by points was attempted to attempted to be set be set N
321. the 1st and 2nd lines in the display area significant digits in the lower four digits of a step number are displayed On the 3rd and 4th lines in the display area up to five significant digits in a step number are displayed Mode Displays significant digits in the lower four digits of a step number Displays up to five significant digits in a step number Step number b Device display Two or more device specifications attached to a basic or application instruction are displayed using the same step number For information on the step numbers see Paragraph 4 above 6 Display of data input from the keys Data input from the keys will appear at the cursor position As more characters are input the cursor moves to the right The cursor appears as gy Example The user enters SET gt 1 0 R Op LD X0000 4 1 OR M10 2 OUT M100 3 LD M100 3 15 3 SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC GOT 7 Shifting of data to the left during the input of a program When the user inputs a program the codes entered before a touch GO key will appear on the 4th bottom line of the display area If the codes cannot appear on a single line the display on the 4th line only will shift by a single character position to the left each time the user touches a key Each character that goes out of the display area by the left shift operation is retai
322. ther or not voice output is provided from the external speaker only the voice specified for the touch input sound on the drawing software Factory set to OFF eScreen save time Setthe time until the monitor screen display is switched off by the screen saver function When this setting is 0 the monitor screen is always displayed Factory set to 0 Screen save light When this setting is OFF the backlight goes off as soon as the display is erased by the screen saver function When this setting is ON the display will disappear but the backlight will not go off Reverse display The display mode normal display No highlighted display Yes is selected Only A95 GOT LBD M3 can be selected Normal display is set at the time of shipment Language You can select the language Japanese or English of the messages to be displayed on the screen Factory set to Japanese QBUS extension number Set the GOT extension number for bus connection to the QCPU Factory set to extension 7 QBUS slot number Set the slot number where the GOT is assigned for bus connection to the QCPU Factory set to slot 0 Microcomputer connection baud rate You can select the transmission speed when the GOT is connected to a microcomputer Factory set to 19200 Microcomputer connection communication form You can select the protocol when the GOT is connected to a microcomputer Factory set to FORM 1 QC24 Baud rate Set the transmission sp
323. there is an error at the hardware of the link card The link card in the CPU link unit is judged at the CPU Replace the link unit OFF Online The control depends on whether the master station itself is M9224 Link status ON Offline station to station test online or offline or in the station to station mode or the self or self loopback test loopback mode Check the mode switch OFF Not executed Loop test status ON Normal loop test and sub loop test are being executed Link card error OFF Normal for master station ON Error The control depends on whether the master station itself is executing the normal loop test or the sub loop test 2 When connected to the local station Device ped Description Details number The control depends on whether there is an error at the hardware of the link card The link card in the CPU link unit is judged at the CPU Replace the link unit Link card error OFF Normal for local station ON Error OFF Online The control depends on whether the local station itself is online Link status ON Offline station to station test or offline or in the station to station mode or the self loopback or self loopback test mode Check the mode switch OFF Not executed Loop test status ON Normal loop test and sub loop test are being executed The control depends on whether the local station itself is executing the normal loop test or the sub loop test 21 5 21 ERROR DISPLAY
324. tion Selection 0 1 1 4000 2 1 8000 3 1 12000 6 7 Buffer memory address f er elepay to reference decimal The specified conversion enabled disabled status of each channel is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing sampling processing of each channel is displayed The specified status for the averaging processing of each channel is displayed 4 The values set for the time and count of times for averaging processing of 2109 each channel is displayed The current output value a value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output value of each channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 Resolution selection 2 0 to 8000 3 0 to 12000 The error code is displayed when a writing data error occurs The resolution selection that was set is displayed 10 to 17 12 33 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 13 2 I O monitor SETZ Data MONIT Input Output Monitor Screen RESET Che menu ENP Inputs 6X Outputs Y HOT Error 10 0 1 1 dM READY 1 1 1 Error Error Reset 3 13 3 13 4 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 1 1 1 7 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 B B B B D D D D E E E E F F F F Contents of display The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 12 34 12 OPERATION OF
325. tral zero Phase Signal Switch Latch In Pasitia Signal In Position DOG Signal OPR Request 1 stop Signal OPR Completion Upper Limit Axis Warning Lower Limit Speed Change 0 External Start DP ABS Over YZP Switch OP ABS Under DCC Signal Output Q OQ 2 O OFF Deviation counter Speed position Change External startup Lower limit Upper limit Contents of display The ON OFF status for the external I O signal corresponding to the signal name shown on the screen is displayed ON Bit 15 to 9876543210 Drive module ready Zero point Imposition Proximity point Stop Buffer memory address to reference decimal Axis 2 O OFF Absolute origin point position Underflow Overflow Speed change 0 Bit 15to 1211109 The ON OFF status for the various flags corresponding to the flag shown on the screen is displayed ON to 43210 Speed control in progress Speed position change Command imposition Request for origin point return Axis warning detection Origin point return completed 12 97 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN 12 23 15 Monitoring positioning information MELSEC GOT SET Data MONIT END chg MENU ADTSP Positioning Information Monitar Screen No 1 Pat Me Arc Duell M No thad iz x Address address Speed Time Code 1 01 01
326. ts of display to reference decimal The ON OFF status of the I O signal corresponding to the PLC CPU is displayed The 1 I O signal is ON when displayed in a reverse display 2 The set manual pulser run enabled disabled status is displayed 47 347 3 The data number during execution of current positioning is displayed 48 348 4 Theremaining pointer value is displayed 39 339 Miss ue tee at 602 604 5 The current value during execution of current positioning is displayed 603 605 6 The change value of the current value is displayed Wi 341 42 342 TuS 7912 7922 7 The zero address set value is displayed 7913 7923 8 The set value of the output speed is displayed 600 601 9 The set value of the speed limit is displayed 7874 7894 10 The change value of the speed change is displayed 40 340 11 The set value of the zero return speed is displayed 7914 7924 12 The set value of the zero return creep speed is displayed 7915 7925 13 The set value of the M code is displayed 0 M code not used 46 346 14 The error code is displayed when an error occurs 45 345 The zero return data is displayed Method where return is complete when stopper stops b15 b4 bO 15 7918 7928 Method where return is complete when stopper stops Zero return direction Zero return method 16 The set value of the torque limit is displayed 7917 7927 17 The set value of the dwell time is displayed 7916 7926 12 75 12
327. uence program Before addition f 7 P K80 K5 D20 14 END 9 After addition 7 P_K80 K5 D20 command 4 TO Select the Insert mode 4 K100 5 gt LD TO 6 ANI M 2 SET 1 4 GO 7 020 Read the 14th step to insert 1 14 END the command 15 NOP 16 MOV gt SP gt Ki gt 14 020 t 14 K2Y0018 LY AS GO 49 gt END 20 NOP 9 The command of MOV D20 K2Y0018 was added to Step 14 20 9 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 2 4 Deleting command The following example shows the procedure of deleting the command from the sequence program Before deletion Delete the ANI MO command f After deletion f 5 LD TO Delete the ANI 7 P K80 K5 D20 MO command f Operation example DELETE 14 D20 Select the Delete mode 14 K2Y0018 19 END 20 NCP 2 SET 6 90 510 TO Read the 6th step 6AN 7 P 7 K80 GO The key deletes the command at the cursor position The step number is brought forward V The ANI MO command was deleted 20 10 20 OPERATION OF EDITING SCREEN FOR EACH LIST MELSEC GOT 20 2 5 Using Help function HELP is input to use the Help function Input of HELP displays the Help function menus in each mode Select the corresponding item for execution 1 Reading the command in the sequence program Exa
328. used from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi s expectations compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi general purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for each Japan Railways company or the Department of Defense shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications Note that even with these applications if the user approves that the application is to be limited and a special quality is not required application shall be possible When considering use in aircraft medical applications railways incineration
329. user data including sequence program is also cleared The keyword registered in the ACPU can be changed or a new keyword can be registered as shown in Chapter 20 19 3 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT When input of a keyword is requested all parameters and sequence programs can be cleared together with the keyword registered in the ACPU using the operation below Step 1 Display the keyword input request KEYWORD Step 2 Stop operation of ACPU Step 3 Operation of PC memory all clear Input ALLCLR and press the GO key cp cS Ee c n eo Step 4 Display of PC memory all clear process When the GOT starts clearing the process the display in the left appears and the total number of bytes change sequentially wee column ALL CLEAR 20KB eee maximum 10 per process is displayed according to the memory capacity to be cleared As the clearing process proceeds each is deleted One shows 10 of memory capacity The memory capacity total number of bytes to be cleared is displayed in kbytes As the clearing process proceeds 1 kbyte is decreased Step 5 Completion of PC memory all clear process When the GOT completes the clearing process the screen in the left appears status before the mode selection MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM PRESS MODE KEY Step 6 Select the mode as in 19 2 2 and start the fo
330. ve 7eorss ceu A970GOT TBA EU Low voltage directive compliant unit Thea and Mop OR EY To know the part names of the GOT A900 series EMC directive Low altel unit voltage directive compliant unit To know how to install and wire the GOT A900 series EMC directive Low voltage directive compliant unit To know the outline dimension drawing of the GOT A900 series EMC directive Low voltage directive compliant unit A950GOT TBD SBD LBD M3 A951GOT QTBD QSBD QLBD M3 A951GOT TBD SBD LBD M3 A953GOT TBD SBD LBD M3 A956GOT TBD SBD LBD M3 User s Manual Hardware e To know the features of AB50GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT unit correos 1A951GOT QTBD QSBD QLBD M3 To confirm the specifications of worms Found in the packing H A956GOT TBD SBD LBD M3 f h A T A950GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT unit ROS IQOT ASS3GOT To know the part names of A956GOT unit A950GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT unit To know how to install and wire A950GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT unit To know the outline dimension drawing of A950GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT unit GOT A900 Series Option Unit User s Manuals To know the features of the corresponding GOT A900 series option unit e To confirm the specifications of the corresponding GOT A900 series option unit users Manuais gu donde To know the part names of the corresponding GOT A900 series option unit GOT A900 series To kno
331. w display screen for test See Sec 12 1 5 Touch DataChg and SET RESET 2 Touch Monitor screen for specified monitor menu See Sec 12 1 4 Touch MONIT MENU Go to user created monitor screen or utility screen 12 7 See Sec 12 1 2 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 2 A61LS module monitor 12 2 1 Operation monitor SET EN 861LS Operation Monitor Screen RESET Che MENU END 1 Limit Switch Function Program No 0 Positioning Set Value Set Valu Data A B Channel No FEDCBASS 76543210 2 Output Status 0110110110110110 Channel 0123 0123 Output Enable 0110110110110110 Channel 1 0123 0129 Channel 2 0123 0123 Status O DFF 1 0M Enable O Enabled i Disabled Channel 3 0123 0123 4 0123 0123 3 Measured Distance 0123456789 Channel 5 0123 0123 Channel 6 0123 0129 4 Resolver Speed 0123 rpm Channel 7 0123 0123 Channel 8 0123 0123 5 Target Address 0123 Error 01 Channel 9 0123 0123 Channel 0123 0123 6 Compensation val 0123 under low 0 Channel B 0123 0123 Overt Lau 0 Channel C 0123 0123 7 Compensated Address 0123 Batt Error 0 Channel D 0123 0123 Channel E 0123 0123 0 Nomal 1 Channel F 0123 0123 Buffe
332. w the outline dimension drawing of the corresponding GOT A900 series option unit option unit A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT User s Manual e To know the features of A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit e To confirm the component devices of A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT User s Manual A960GOT unit e Toconfirm the specifications of AJBSGOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit e To know the part names of A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit e To fit various units to ABB5GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit e To know howto install and wire A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit e To know how to maintain and inspect A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit e To confirm the error codes of 985 A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit e To know the outline dimension drawing of A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit Available as an option A950GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT User s Manual e To know the features of A950GOT A951GOT 953GOT A956GOT unit e To confirm the component devices of A950GOT A951GOT 953GOT User s Manual A956GOT unit Available as an option e To confirm the specifications of ABBOGOT A951GOT 953GOT A956GOT unit To know the part names of AB50GOT A951GOT 953GOT A956GOT unit e To fit various units to A950GOT A951GOT 953GOT A956GOT unit To know how to install and wire ABBOGOT A951GOT 953GOT A956GOT unit To know how to maintain and inspect ABBOGOT A951GOT 953GOT A9
333. when a watchdog timer error occurs A E is displayed when an error occurs 4 is displayed when a temperature was input that exceeds the measurement temperature range set for the measurement range of each channel 10 to 17 12 54 12 OPERATION OF EACH SPECIAL MODULE MONITOR SCREEN MELSEC GOT 12 18 6 Graph monitor INPUT 0 F SETZ Data MONIT amp 616TD Graph Monitor Screen INPUT 0 RESET Che MENU END Input Status X 0 0 50 100 50 100 Channel 0 Channel 1 Scale A 0 Channel 2 Data Format 0 Channel 3 Scale B i0 Channel 4 Data Format 1 Channel 5 1 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel 8 Channel 9 Channel A Channel B B Error Channel C Werror 2 Channel D MCigital Val Err Channel E Eem val Err Channel F Channel Mo FEDCBA9676543210 Channel Ma FEDCBA9676543210 Data Format 0110110110110110 Conversion 0110110110110110 Enable 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Buffer memory address to f displ Contents or disney reference hexadecimal For a channel not connected to the 6 __ 1 the current output value value between 0 to 4000 for the digital output of that channel is displayed as a percentage ranging from 0 to 100 70 to 7F When a channel is connected to the A60MX 1__ _ the above is displayed for the digital output value for CHO of AGOMX _ A E is displayed when a watchdog timer error occurs A E is displayed when an error occu
334. y Start Start up the GOT Display the user created monitor screen teen Activate the list editor function by touching a touch key to which you have assigned this expanded function using the The screen switches drawing software automatically after about one second it the utility menu or ladder monitor screen is displayed touch the LIST EDITER key to activate the list editor function Start the list editor function Is a keyword stored in the ACPU If no keyword is stored If a keyword is stored Enter the keyword stored in the connected ACPU See Section 19 2 1 Keyword GO MODE SELECTION WRITE DEL OTHERS MODE SELECTION READ INS PARAM PRESS MODE KEY PRESS MODE KEY READ waite INSERT DELETE PARAM OTHER See Section 19 2 2 INSERT MODE i DELETE PARAMATER OTHER See Chapter 20 Selection of a different mode 19 2 19 OPERATION PROCEDURES FOR THE LIST EDITOR FUNCTION MELSEC GOT 19 2 1 Operation of keyword input If a keyword is registered in the ACPU when the connected ACPU or the ACPU PLC No corresponding to the operation is changed the GOT requests for input of the registered keyword Input the keyword registered in the ACPU and press the GO key If a keyword is not registered in the
335. y devices can be entered DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET To enter more than 8 delete in order from the old entry REPRE NS STATIONIFF device The 8 most recent entry device will be 15 2147483648 DW monitored 10 gu As needed re enter after deleting the entry device 25 For the method of deletion see Sec 9 2 3 e 200 43 50 68378428 DW 0 3 2 lt NI ae Do if needed For the display change method see Sec 9 1 2 Change the screen display 9 OPERATION OF THE VARIOUS SYSTEM MONITOR SCREENS MELSEC GOT 9 2 2 Entry monitor screen display and key functions In this section the Entry Monitor screen display and the functions of the keys displayed at the 1 Display DEVICE MONITOR TEST MENU FORM SET top of the screen are explained Input switch 3 NETWK No 0 STATION FF D 200 30 When comment is not displayed max 8 devices Line 1 current units When comment is displayed max 4 devices W 200 43 Display when system monitoring Production line A Bit device ON O OFF R50 68378428 DW Word device Current value link status X3 Displays shown in the keys that are used with the operation of the Entry Monitor screen 2 Touch input Displays the monitor station network No and station No Displays the status and current value of the device 2 Key functions Th

GOT-A900 Series Operating Manual(SW4D5C

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents